JP2019122676A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a Pachinko game machine capable of increasing amusement of a game.SOLUTION: In a latent probability variation game state, a Pachinko game machine can set the latent probability variation game state after the end of a special game to be executed upon a big winning when a result of a win/lose determination of a second special symbol is the big winning and a stop symbol indicating the big winning is a predetermined big winning symbol. In a normal game state, the Pachinko game machine does not set the latent probability variation game state after the end of the special game to be executed upon the big winning when a result of the win/lose determination of the second special symbol is the big winning and the stop symbol indicating the big winning is the predetermined big winning symbol. The probability in which the latent probability variation game state is set after the end of the special game to be executed when the result of the win/lose determination of the first special symbol is the big winning in the latent probability variation game state and the probability in which the latent probability variation game state is set after the end of the special game to be executed when the result of the win/lose determination of the first special symbol is the big winning in the normal game state are the same.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8

Description

  The present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine generally acquires a random number value for lottery in response to the game ball entering the starting opening, and temporarily stores it as an operation holding ball up to a predetermined upper limit number. Such an operation reserving ball is sequentially digested one by one each time a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and a judgment of whether or not it corresponds to a big hit is executed. When the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit, after displaying the symbols in a plurality of lines in a variable display, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode, and the big winning opening, which is normally closed, is opened. Special game (big hit game) is established.

  In this type of pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the above judgment of the success or failure is a big hit, the gaming state after the end of the special game may differ depending on the type of the big hit symbol displayed and stopped at the end of the fluctuation display Are known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-120804 A

  Since many pachinko gaming machines adopting such a configuration already exist as conventional models, in order to differentiate them from conventional models, it is required to further improve the fun of gaming.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a pachinko game machine capable of improving the amusement of a game.

  In order to achieve such an object, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed, and a first starting opening provided at a predetermined position of the gaming area and capable of entering gaming balls. Is determined at a position different from the first starting opening of the gaming area, the second starting opening where the game ball can enter, and entering the determination of the game triggered by the entrance of the game ball to the first starting opening The first pass / fail decision means, the second pass / fail decision means which executes the pass / fail decision triggered by the game ball entering the second starting opening, the result of the pass / fail decision by the first pass / fail decision means or When the result of the success or failure judgment by the success or failure judgment means is a big hit, a special game execution device for executing a special game advantageous to the player, the result of success or failure judgment by the first success or failure judgment device, and the success or failure by the second success / failure judgment device The result of the judgment is a big hit with a predetermined probability Low probability state, and the high probability state in which the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means and the result of the success / failure determination by the second success / failure determination means is a big hit with a higher probability than the predetermined probability A lottery state control means capable of setting a probability state or setting a high probability state, and a first symbol display device in which a first symbol indicating the result of the yes / no determination by the first yes / no decision means is variably displayed and stopped. The second symbol display device in which the second symbol indicating the result of the success or failure judgment by the second success or failure judgment means is variably displayed and stopped, and the first symbol is variably displayed and stopped in the first symbol display device The first symbol display control means, the second symbol display control means for variably displaying and stopping the second symbol in the second symbol display device, and the average value of the variation display time of the second symbol is predetermined Setting of the first fluctuation state or the second fluctuation state having at least the first fluctuation state between the two and the second fluctuation state in which the average value of the fluctuation display time of the second symbol is shorter than the predetermined time The effect display device displaying at least a change state control means capable of executing setting of the effect, a result indicating the result of the success or failure judgment by the first success or failure judgment means or the result of the success or failure judgment by the second success or failure judgment means; In the high probability state and the second fluctuation state, the result of the judgment of the success or failure by the second validity judgment means becomes a big hit, and the second showing the big hit is provided. When the stop symbol of the symbol is a predetermined big hit symbol, after the end of the special game executed triggered by the big hit, it is possible to set the high probability state and the second fluctuation state, low probability state and In the first variation state, the result of the success or failure judgment by the second success or failure judgment means is a big hit, and when the stop symbol of the second symbol showing the big hit is the predetermined big hit symbol, the special which is executed triggered by the big hit After the end of the game, the high probability state and the second fluctuation state are not set, but it is executed when the result of the judgment of the first judgment by the first judgment unit in the high probability state and the second fluctuation state becomes a big hit Special that is executed when the probability of setting the high probability state and the second fluctuation state after the end of the game and the result of the judgment of the first judgment whether in the low probability state and the first fluctuation state will be a big hit It is characterized in that the probability of setting the high probability state and the second fluctuation state after the end of the game is the same probability.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. It is a rear view of the above-mentioned pachinko game machine. It is a control block diagram of the above pachinko gaming machine. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and the effect control board of the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine. It is a schematic diagram which shows a special symbol equivalence lottery table. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the big hit non-lottery process in the pass / fail determination of a special symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows a 1st special symbol big hit symbol table, (B) is a schematic diagram which shows a 2nd special symbol big hit symbol table. It is a transition diagram of a game state and an effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows a game state setting table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table 1. FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing a fluctuation pattern table 2; FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing a fluctuation pattern table 3; FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing a fluctuation pattern table 4; FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing a fluctuation pattern table 5; (A) is a schematic diagram which shows a normal symbol equivalence lottery table, (B) is a schematic diagram which shows a normal symbol variation pattern table, (C) is a schematic diagram which shows a normal motorized character opening pattern table. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the simultaneous variation process of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the flow of a latent mode turning effect. FIG. 17 is a transition diagram for explaining changes in fluctuation state when transitioning from the latent probability change gaming state to the normal gaming state. It is a time chart of a big hit signal outputted from an external information terminal board. It is a time chart of the continuous signal in the middle which is output from the external information terminal board. It is a time chart of the symbol determination signal output from an external information terminal board. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main process. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 22 of the main control side main processing. It is a flow chart which shows main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize surveillance processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening monitoring control processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation start surveillance control processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change start monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol control processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol control general-purpose processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol stop symbol display. It is a flow chart which shows control processing following Drawing 33 of processing under special symbol stop symbol display processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special electric symbol combination control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 35 of a special motorized prize control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 36 of a special motorized prize control process. It is a flowchart which shows a reset start process. It is a flow chart which shows production control side main processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control side timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows image control command transmission interruption processing. It is a transition diagram of the game state and the effect mode in the modification of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the presentation mode table in the modification of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of presentation of the remaining frequency alerting | reporting in the modification of this embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a time chart of the invincible zone presentation of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic screen of the invincible zone production of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the fluctuation | variation interruption process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of presentation of the remaining fluctuation time alerting | reporting production of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game state setting table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a variation time comparison table of the special symbol of a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a schematic view showing a regular symbol equality lottery table of the third embodiment, (B) is a schematic view showing a regular symbol variation pattern table of the third embodiment, (C) is a regular electric combination of the third embodiment It is a schematic diagram which shows a thing open pattern table. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows the 1st special symbol big hit symbol table of 4th Embodiment, (B) is a schematic diagram which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit symbol table of 4th Embodiment. It is a variation time comparison table of the special symbol of a 4th embodiment.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

First Embodiment
A front view and a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment are shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2. First, with reference to this drawing, the general configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be outlined. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment is a model in which two functions corresponding to the conventional first pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and the first game (the first special symbol game) and the second It is possible to develop a game (second special symbol game).

<Basic configuration of pachinko gaming machine>
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine PM (also simply referred to as "game machine PM") is fitted to the opening front of the outer frame 1 forming the vertical fixed holding frame configured in the outer rectangular frame size as shown in FIG. The front frame 2 configured in a rectangular frame size and forming an opening and closing mounting frame is mounted so as to be able to open, close and open and close sideways by upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3 disposed at the front left side edge of each other. By means of a locking device 4 which is referred to as a provided double lock, it is always held in a closed state engaged with the outer frame 1.

  A rectangular glass frame 5 fitted to the upper front surface area of the front frame 2 is laterally open / close and detachably assembled using the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3, and a locking device 4 is used. It is always held in a closed state covering the front of the front frame 2. In the front frame 2, the game board 20 is detachably set and held, so that the game area PA on the front of the game board 20 can be viewed visibly through the multilayer glass of the glass frame 5 which is always closed and held. There is.

  On the front side of the glass frame 5, a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light according to the game development status, and a speaker 11 that generates sound effects according to the game development status are provided. Upper and lower ball trays (upper ball tray 8 and lower ball tray 9) for storing gaming balls are provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5. At the front center of the upper ball tray 8, a player performs pressing operation A button (effect switch) 15 is provided, and on the front right side of the lower ball tray 9, a firing handle 12 for performing a shooting operation of the game ball is provided. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the operation input means for effect is referred to as “effect button 15”, but the effect button (effect switch) 15 in this example is a button type switch of on / off operation type, in the direction of operation input Cross-shaped switch (cross key, cross button) that performs output according to, tilt switch lever switch, rotary dial switch, proximity switch that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches It is used in the concept including all operation input means such as switches, touch sensors, and touch panels.

  The game board 20 is configured based on a substrate formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using, for example, a synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or ABS resin. On the front surface of the game board 20, a substantially circular game area PA in which the outer rails 41 and the inner rails 42 are fixed in an arc shape and on which game balls can be rolled is defined. Further, a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the game area PA is formed by the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42, and a position near the outlet opening of the game ball in the guide passage A ball return prevention valve 43 is disposed at the tip end portion to prevent the game ball discharged from the outlet opening into the game area PA from returning back to the guide passage again. In this game area PA, there are various types such as the first start opening 51, the second start opening 52, the operation gate 53, the special winning opening 54, the general winning openings 61, 62, 63, 64, as well as a windmill and a large number of game nails. Other than the winning opening, the first special symbol display device 71, the second special symbol display device 72, the first special view reserve lamp 73, the second special view reserve lamp 74, the normal symbol display apparatus 75, the common view reserve lamp 76, etc. Various display devices are provided. A center decoration 21 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the central opening of the center decoration 21. The game area PA is a left area PA1 which is an area on the left side of the center decoration 21 (a board surface area corresponding to a left strike) with respect to the center decoration 21 substantially at the center, and an area on the right side of the center decoration 21 (right And the right side area PA2 which is the board surface area corresponding to A top plate portion 22 opposed to the outer rail 41 in a substantially vertical direction is integrally formed on the upper portion of the center decoration 21, and between the top plate portion 22 and the outer rail 41 in extension of the above-mentioned guide passage. A communication passage 44 is formed, through which the game ball can pass to the right side area PA2. At the lower end of the game area PA, an out port 29 is provided for discharging the game balls rolled down without entering each winning port to the back side of the game board 20. Hereinafter, each component provided in the game board 20 will be described in order.

  The first starting opening 51 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and is provided with a first starting opening switch 511 for detecting entry of the game ball. The first starting opening 51 is a normally open winning opening with an upward opening, and a gaming ball (a left-handed gaming ball) that mainly flows down the left area PA1 can enter. Entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 51 is a trigger for the first special symbol lottery.

  The second starting opening 52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and is provided with a second starting opening switch 521 for detecting entry of the game ball. The second starting opening 51 is disposed in the right area PA2 which is a board area corresponding to a right hit, and a game ball (right hit game ball) flowing down the right area PA2 can enter mainly. Entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 52 triggers the second special symbol lottery. The second start port 52 is provided with a normal motorized component 522 generally referred to as a power chow and a common motorized component solenoid 523 for driving the common motorized component 522 to open and close.

  The ordinary electric accessory 522 changes the game ball into an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter or into the second starting opening 52. In other words, the ordinary electric role 522 has a structure in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second starting opening 52 unless it is displaced to the open state, and it is a predetermined trigger (trigger to win the normal symbol lottery) described later. When it is in the open state, the ease of entering the game ball is enhanced. The ordinary motor-operated part 522 is provided with a movable member 524 of the front and rear slide type for opening and closing the second starting port 52. The movable member 524 closes the second start opening 52 to make it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball, and the second start opening 52 allows the game ball to enter the closed position. It is slidable in the front-rear direction (direction orthogonal to the board surface) between the opening position (retraction position) to be made easy. The upper surface of the movable member 524 has a passage width of about one or more game balls in the front-rear direction, and is formed to incline downward from the right side to the left side in a front view. Therefore, when the movable member 524 is in the closed position (when the second starting opening 52 is in the closed state), the gaming ball can flow down the upper surface of the movable member 524 as a guiding path, and the guiding path is leftward from the right It flows down to the left and falls from the left end of the ordinary motor-operated symbol 522.

  The special electric character 542 (large winning opening 54) is disposed below the ordinary electric character 522, and the gaming ball having passed the upper surface of the ordinary electric character 522 flows downward toward the large prize opening 54. If the special winning opening 54 is open at this time, it is easy for the gaming ball to enter the special winning opening 54. On the other hand, when the movable member 524 is in the open position (when the second start opening 52 is in the open state), it becomes easy for the gaming ball flowing down the right area PA2 to enter the second start opening 52 There is. In this example, the game balls flowing down the right side area PA2 have a board surface design (gauge design) that flows toward the second starting opening 52 (the ordinary electric character 522) with a high probability (approximately 100%). 2 If the starting opening 52 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is guided to the upper surface of the movable member 524 and flows down toward the big winning opening 54, while if the second starting opening 52 is in the opening state, the gaming ball is The second starting opening 52 is entered so as not to reach the large winning opening 54.

  The actuation gate 53 is provided as a start winning hole corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an actuation gate switch 531 for detecting passage of gaming balls. In addition, passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 becomes an opportunity of the normal symbol lottery for determining whether the 2nd starting opening 52 shall be in an open state.

  The big winning opening 54 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the result of the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The special winning opening 54 is a special winning opening switch 541 for detecting entry of the game ball, a special electric jack 542 generally referred to as an attacker, and a large winning prize for opening and closing the special electric jack 542. A mouth solenoid 543 is provided. The special electric character 542 is variable between an open state where the game ball can enter or is easy to enter and a closed state where the game ball can not enter or difficult to enter the big winning opening 54. In the present example, the special winning opening 54 is provided in the right area PA2 of the game area PA. Therefore, in the special game (big hit game, small hit game), when firing the game ball, it is easy to hit the big winning opening 54 by hitting the right area PA2 so-called right hit. It has become.

  The general winning openings 61 to 63 are disposed in the left area PA1 which is a board area corresponding to a left hit, and the game ball which has flowed down the left area PA1 can enter. The general winning openings 61 to 63 are provided with a general winning opening switch 611 for detecting entry of the game ball. The general winning opening switch 611 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) of the three general winning openings 61 to 63 from the viewpoint of cost reduction etc., and the game ball is inserted into any of the general winning openings 61 to 63. Spheres can also be detected. In addition, entering a game ball to each general winning a prize opening 61-63 does not become the opportunity of drawing of special symbol or normal symbol, but it is the opportunity of winning a prize ball similarly to other winning a prize mouths (except for operation gate 53) It becomes.

  Among the various types of winning openings, the first start opening 51 and the actuation gate 53 are displayed when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed with a stop symbol indicating a big hit (the condition device described later In the case of operation, the combination operation gates 91 and 92 serving as an execution trigger of the big hit game are also used. The first starting opening 51 is also used as the first combination operation gate 91 capable of entering game balls flowing down the left side area PA, and the first combination operation gate switch 911 for detecting entry of the game balls is used. Have. The operation gate 53 doubles as a second combination operation gate 92 through which the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can pass, and is provided with a second combination operation gate switch 921 for detecting the passage of the game ball. In the following, the terms "enter" and "pass" of the gaming ball to 91, 92 to each combination operation gate are interpreted synonymously, and the term "pass" is mainly used.

  In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol or the second variation display of the second special symbol is determined and displayed by the stop symbol (big hit symbol) indicating a big hit, the gaming ball is the first combination run gate 91 or the second combination run On the condition that the operation gate 92 is passed, a big hit game is started. In addition, after the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined and displayed by the stop symbol (big hit symbol) indicating the big hit, the gaming ball is operated by the first combination run gate 91 or the second combination run The period until the gate 92 is passed (until the big hit game is started) is also referred to as "big hit game waiting state". Therefore, even if the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finalized by the big hit symbol, the big hit game is not started unless the gaming ball passes through any of the combination operation gates 91, 92 (( The waiting state of the big hit game continues). Here, from the time when the game ball passes the combination operation gates 91 and 92 after the stop display of the big hit symbol, the time until the first round of the big hit game is started (that is, the big hit start demonstration time) is the big hit It may be made different depending on the gaming state when the symbol is stopped and displayed. In particular, when a big hit in the latent probability change gaming state (or positive variation gaming state or time saving game state) described later, a relatively short time (for example: 1 second), when a big hit in the normal gaming state, a relatively long time (example : 10 seconds). The reason is that, in the case of a big hit in the latent probability variation gaming state (or the probability variation gaming state or the short time gaming state), it is in order to increase the continuous shooting speed (big hit continuous generation speed). Conversely, if you want to slow down the speed, if you hit big in the latent probability variation gaming state (or probability variation gaming state or time saving state) if you hit a big hit in the normal gaming state for a relatively long time (eg 10 seconds) May be relatively short (eg, 1 second). On the other hand, the small hit game does not require the game ball to pass through the combination operation gates 91 and 92, and actively starts the small hit game (only with the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed). It is possible. From the viewpoint of cost reduction and space saving, a configuration may be adopted in which the common operation gate switches 911 and 921 are shared with the first start port switch 511 and the operation gate switch 531, respectively. In addition, each combination operation gate 91, 92 may not be used as the first start port 51 and the operation gate 53, and the first start port 51 and the operation gate 53 may be provided separately. In the case where each combination operation gate 91, 92 is configured independently of the first start port 51 and the operation gate 53, the left combination type operation gate 91 is disposed near the upstream side of the first start port 51. The right combination operating gate 92 is disposed in the vicinity of the operation gate 53 or the upstream side of the big winning opening 54, and the gaming balls flowing down toward the first starting opening 51 may have a high frequency (100% probability) ) Through the left combination operating gate 91, and the game ball flowing down toward the activation gate 53 or the big winning opening 54 passes through the right combination operating gate 92 with high frequency (may be 100% probability). It may be adopted. In addition, when the first combination operation gate 91 is configured as a separate member from the first start port 51, it may be disposed directly below the first start port 51 or in series with the first start port horizontally or vertically. Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, a configuration in which only the first combination driving gate 91 is disposed (a configuration in which the second combination coupling gate 92 is not disposed) or a configuration in which only the second combination coupling gate 92 is disposed A configuration in which one combination driving gate 91 is not disposed may be employed.

  The first special symbol display device 71 performs variable display and finalized display of the first special symbol in response to the game ball entering the first starting opening 51 as a trigger. The first special symbol display device 71 is constituted of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variable display of the first special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display The first special symbol is finalized and displayed.

  The second special symbol display device 72 performs variable display and finalized display of the second special symbol in response to the game ball entering the second starting opening 52 as a trigger. The second special symbol display device 72 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variation display of the second special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display The second special symbol is finalized and displayed.

  The first special view reserve lamp 73 and the second special view reserve lamp 74 are respectively composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the lighting / flashing display of the lamp Express each (up to 4 each). The number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol is the number according to the random number value acquired based on the ball entering the first starting opening 51 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the big hit game. Yes, indicates the number of holding the acquired random number value, that is, the number of the judgment that the judgment of acceptance is temporarily held until the condition for judging the acceptance of the judgment (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value. Similarly, the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is a random number value acquired based on entering the ball to the second starting opening 52 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the big hit game. This is a number related to this, and holds the acquired random number value, that is, indicates the number by which the propriety judgment is temporarily suspended until the qualification judgment permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value. There is.

  The normal symbol display device 75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs normal symbol variable display and final display. The general drawing reserve lamp 76 is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of reserved symbol variations (the number of normal symbol variations not yet executed). In addition, on the left side of the normal symbol display device 75, there is provided a round display 77 for displaying the number of round games (unit game) in the big hit game (the number of rounds: the number of times the special electric character 542 is operated continuously). ing.

  The effect display device 70 mainly includes a change effect of the decorative symbol for changing display / stop display interlockingly with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a effect including a notice effect for suggesting or notifying the expectation of the big hit in advance. Along with displaying the image, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on hold. Specifically, a decorative symbol display unit 700 is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70 in which the variable display of the decorative symbol or the notice effect display is performed, and the first special view holding lamp 73 and the second special view holding lamp 74. A holding image display unit 710 is provided in which holding display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the first special symbol. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is employed as the effect display device 70. In the decorative symbol display portion 700, three columns of display regions (left display region Z1, middle display region Z2, right display region Z3) serving as variable display regions of decorative symbols are provided on predetermined effective lines (not shown). The left symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the left display region Z1, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the middle display region Z2, and the right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the right display region Z3 are respectively stopped and displayed. It has become so. In the normal display mode, when the operation reserve ball of the special symbol is generated in the normal display mode, the reserve image (hold icon) of the predetermined mode is displayed, and the corresponding operation reserve ball is handled. The pending image is lost. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the generation order of the operation reserved balls of the special symbol (the order of ball entry), up to eight (four reserved images of the first special symbol, 4 reserved images of the second special symbol) Can be displayed.

  The center ornament 21 is installed around the effect display device 70, and has functions such as a channel of the game ball, protection of the effect screen, and decoration. The center ornament 21 is provided with a movable character 24 for executing a rendering operation according to the development status of the game. The movable part 24 is configured to include a motor M (for example, a stepping motor) as a drive source. In addition, the game board 20 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light in accordance with the development status of the game. In the following description, for convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25 are collectively referred to as a "production lamp LP".

  Subsequently, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. On the back side of the front frame 2, there is a back setting board 30 based on a base frame body formed in a rectangular frame shape somewhat smaller than the front frame 2 having a window communicating back and forth in the center. Through the hinge mechanism 3, it is connected to the rear of the front frame 2 so as to be able to open, close, and detach. On the back setting board 30, a back set cover 30C in the form of a rectangular box with an open front face is detachably attached, and is always disposed covering the back side of the game board 20 attached to the front frame 2. (This causes the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the image control board 300 described later to be covered by the back set cover 30C).

  Each part of the back setting board 30 is connected to the storage tank 31 for storing a large number of gaming balls, the tank rail 32 extending with a gentle downward slope from the storage tank 31, and the right end of the tank rail 32 The ball supply passage 33 extending in the direction, the prize ball payout unit 34 paying out the gaming balls guided by the ball feed passage 33, the prize for guiding the gaming balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 to the upper bowl 6 A ball passage 35 and the like are provided.

  On the back side of the game board 10, a main control board 100 for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM in an integrated manner, an effect control board 200 for controlling the overall effects, image display according to the game development, control of sound effects An image control board 300 for carrying out image processing is attached. On the other hand, on the back side of the back setting board 30, a payout control board 400 for controlling the launch and payout of gaming balls, and power from the gaming facility side to supply power to various control boards and electric / electronic parts A power supply substrate 500 is mounted, an external information terminal board 600 (see FIG. 3) for outputting an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine PM, and the like are attached. These control boards are assembled at a predetermined position on the back of the game board 20 or the back setting board 30 in an assembled state housed in a transparent resin base case having a caulking structure and a sealing structure to prevent tampering. It is arranged. The control board and the electric / electronic parts of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are mutually connected via a harness (connector cable), and the pachinko gaming machine PM is configured to be operable.

<Control configuration of pachinko gaming machine>
Next, each control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

  The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processing related to gaming, a ROM 102 that stores control programs and various data, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area or buffer memory serving as a temporary storage area, peripheral boards and each A main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 including an I / O port circuit 104 for inputting and outputting signals to and from the device is mounted, and the main CPU 101 executes a game according to a control program stored in the ROM 102 It is configured to carry out the main control of the progression. In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 is a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and is reset when the main CPU 101 malfunctions or runs out. Operates as a separate system from the WDT circuit that recovers to a normal state, the CTC circuit that enables the occurrence of real-time interrupts and time measurement, and the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101, and generates a predetermined random number (internal random number) A random number generation circuit etc. are mounted, and these are mutually connected via an internal bus.

  The main CPU 101 executes various processing related to main control of the game by reading various control programs stored in the ROM 102 and performing arithmetic processing based on detection information and the like from each switch. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit backed up by a backup power supply generated in the power supply substrate 500. The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as the stack pointer and each register held at the time of the power shutdown when the power shutdown occurs. The state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power failure based on the information of the backup area.

  In addition, the main control board 100 includes a first start opening switch 511, a second start opening switch 521, an operation gate switch 531, a special winning opening switch 541, a general winning opening switch 611, a combination operation gate switch 911, 921 and the like. The main CPU 101 receives detection signals from various switches via the I / O port circuit 104. In addition, the main control board 100, the first special symbol display device 71, the second special symbol display device 72, the first special view reserve lamp 73, the second special view reserve lamp 74, the normal symbol display device 75 and the common view reserve lamp It is electrically connected to 76, and is also electrically connected to the ordinary motor combination solenoid 523 and the special electric combination solenoid 543, and various control signals from the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. Send to display means and various solenoids. Further, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the external information terminal board 600, and transmits the game information signal from the main CPU 101 to the external terminal board 600 via the I / O port 104. Based on the game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100, the external information terminal board 600 transmits various external information signals to an external device (data display, hall computer, etc.) installed outside the gaming machine PM. Send. The game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100 may be input to the external information terminal board 600, for example, via the payout control board 300 or the like.

  The main control substrate 100 and the effect control substrate 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communication is performed only in a single direction from the main control substrate 100 to the effect control substrate 200. The various effect control commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200, which are connected as possible. It is not possible to transmit data from the effect control board 200 to the main control board 100, and it is not possible to request the main control board 100 to transmit data.

  The effect control board 200 has a sub main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processing related to game effects based on effect control commands from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores effect control programs and various data, etc., a work area serving as a temporary storage area, The effect control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 configured to include a RAM 203 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral substrates and devices is mounted. The sub main CPU 201 is configured to execute main control relating to a game effect according to a control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, although not shown, the clock circuit for dividing the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate the internal system clock is reset to the effect control board 200, and the sub main CPU 201 is reset when it malfunctions or runs out. Circuit to return to normal state, TPU circuit to output various signals based on system clock, interrupt controller to start various interrupts such as timer interrupt based on signals from TPU circuit, etc., to input / output serial data A serial communication circuit or the like is mounted, and they are mutually connected via an internal bus.

  The effect control board 200 is an image control command for instructing the image control board 300 to generate an image and sound, and a lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 91 in the effect control process based on the effect control command from the main control board 100. (Lamp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like are generated. The effect control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to enable two-way communication, and while an image control command regarding an image and sound is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300, this response is A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been successfully received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200.

  Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to the lamp connection board 91 mounted with a plurality of LED drivers, and a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 is provided via the serial communication circuit. Send. In the present example, serial communication of clock synchronous system is adopted between the effect control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91, and transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit via the data line in synchronization with the clock signal. The lamp connection board 91 incorporates an LED driver that functions in response to a lamp control signal for driving an LED transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches on / off switches in the circuit based on the lamp control signal. Thus, the drive current is supplied to or shut off from the effect lamp LP to perform control to turn on or turn off the effect lamp LP.

  Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to the plurality of motor drivers 92, and a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92 is sent to the motor driver 92 via the I / O port circuit 204. Send. The motor driver 92 supplies drive current to the stepping motor of each movable part 24 by switching on / off a switch in the circuit based on a drive control signal for accessory drive transmitted from the effect control board 200. Alternatively, it shuts off and controls the movable items 24 to operate. A parallel communication method is adopted for data transmission to the motor driver 92.

  The image control board 300 has a sub-sub-CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processing related to image effects based on image control commands from the effect control board 200, a ROM 302 storing image control programs and various data, and a work area serving as a temporary storage area. And an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310 configured with a RAM 303 that functions as a buffer memory, and an I / O port circuit 304 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral substrates and devices. The sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute main control relating to image rendering in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM 302. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the image control board 300 is in line with the effect contents based on the VDP for generating image data according to the effect contents based on the control signal obtained from the sub sub CPU 301 and the control signal obtained from the sub sub CPU 301 And a sound source IC for generating sound data. The VDP is a so-called image processor, reads image data stored in the image ROM according to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and processes the image data to transmit a video signal (image data) generated to the effect display device. The VDP is connected to a high-speed VRAM used to expand and process image data read from the image ROM. The sound source IC reads acoustic data stored in the voice ROM according to an instruction from the sub-sub-CPU 301, synthesizes the acoustic data, and outputs the acoustic data generated to the speaker 11 via an amplifier (digital amplifier).

  The payout control board 400 mainly includes a payout CPU 401, a ROM 402, and a RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be capable of bi-directional communication, and is a control for driving the prize ball dispensing unit 34 based on the payout control command from the main control board 100 to dispense the prize balls. The ball feed mechanism 13 and the launch mechanism 14 are synchronously driven based on the amount of operation of the launch handle 12 to execute control of the launch of the gaming ball.

  Although not shown in detail, power supply substrate 500 is a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used in each control substrate based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply facility on the game island, and a backup power supply. A backup power supply circuit for generating a power supply, and a power cut-off monitor circuit for monitoring a power cut-off due to a voltage drop, and a power supply necessary for electronic and electrical parts such as control boards and gaming devices Supply. The power supply substrate 500 is connected to a power supply switch for activating a power supply circuit, and assuming that the primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, the power supply substrate is turned on when the power supply switch is turned on. A predetermined power supply is supplied from a normal power supply circuit 500 to each control board or the like. The power supply substrate 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device on the gaming island has been cut off, and when the power supply is disconnected, the power control signal (NMI signal) notifying that effect is used as the main control substrate 100. , And the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is configured to be charged when power is supplied from the power supply device on the gaming island to the pachinko gaming machine PM. The power supply substrate 500 is also connected with a RAM clear switch (not shown) for temporarily erasing the temporarily stored contents of the RAM 103 of the main control substrate 100 and setting an initial value when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on. ing. The RAM clear switch may be connected to, for example, the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 500.

<Basic operation of pachinko gaming machine>
In the pachinko gaming machine PM configured as described above, the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the gaming island of the gaming facility, and the front frame 2, the glass frame 5 and the like are closed and locked, and are used for gaming. A game is started by storing game balls in the plate 8 and rotating the firing handle 12. When the firing handle 12 is turned, the gaming balls stored in the upper bowl 8 are sent one by one to the firing mechanism 14 by the ball feeding mechanism 13 disposed on the back side of the glass frame 5, The launch mechanism 14 strikes the game area PA. At this time, when the launch handle 12 is operated with less than a predetermined amount, the gaming ball does not reach the right side area PA2 and flows down the left side area PA1. In the left side area PA1, a left side flow path is formed to allow the game ball to flow toward the first starting opening 51 and the general winning openings 61-63. On the other hand, when the launch handle 12 is operated by a predetermined amount or more, the gaming ball reaches the right area PA2 and flows down the right area PA2. In the right side area PA2, a right side flow path for causing the gaming ball to flow down toward the second starting opening 52, the operation gate 53, and the big winning opening 54 is formed. The gaming balls flowing down the left side area PA1 or the right side area PA2 in this manner are the first starting opening 51, the second starting opening 52, and the operation gate 53 according to the route distributed in the left side area PA1 or the right side area PA1. The player can enter any of the special winning opening 54 and the general winning openings 61 to 63, but if he does not enter any winning opening, he / she flows down to the out opening 29.

  When a game ball flowing down the game area PA enters any of the first starting opening 51, the second starting opening 52, the big winning opening 54, and the general winning openings 61 to 63, an award according to the type of the winning opening The balls are dispensed to the upper bowl 8 or the lower bowl 9 by the winning ball dispensing unit 34. In the present embodiment, as the number of winning balls (the number of unit winning balls) to be paid out when one game ball enters each winning opening, the first starting opening 51 is "four" and the second starting opening 52 is " The general winning openings 61 to 64 are set to “three”, and the large winning opening 54 is set to “ten”. Note that the number of unit winning balls is not limited to that illustrated in the present embodiment, and other unit winning balls may be applied. For example, as the unit winning number of balls, the first starting opening 51 may be “four”, the second starting opening 52 may be “three”, and the general winning openings 61 to 64 may be “five”.

  When the game ball enters the first starting opening 51 or the second starting opening 52, a lottery random number value of a special symbol is acquired, and the random number value is temporarily stored as an operation holding ball of a special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number. Then, when a predetermined start condition (a start condition of fluctuation of a special symbol described later) is satisfied, the lottery symbol random number value relating to the first operation holding ball is subjected to the pass / fail judgment of the special symbol, the symbol judgment, and the fluctuation pattern judgment. The special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the effect display device 70 in a mode according to the determination result. The variation display of the special symbol and the decoration symbol is synchronously stopped after the lapse of the variation time according to the selected variation pattern.

  When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined and displayed in the stop mode indicating a big hit, it shifts to a special game (big hit game) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In each round game (unit game) of this big hit game, an opening and closing operation is performed to change the big winning opening 54 into an open state only once or a plurality of times. When a game ball having a specified count number enters the big winning opening 54 or the opening time of the big winning opening 54 reaches the opening limit time, the round game in progress is ended. Here, the stop aspect of the decorative symbol indicating a big hit is, for example, an aspect in which the types of three symbols match. In the present embodiment, when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are finalized and displayed in the stop mode indicating a big hit, a plurality of round games (unit games) are executed as a big hit game.

  In this embodiment, when the player wins a predetermined big hit, the probability variation function of the special symbol may be activated after the end of the big hit game until the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of ending dates. When the special symbol probability fluctuation function is activated, the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery shifts from the normal low probability state to the high probability state, so that a new big hit (big hit game) occurs relatively early. Become. In addition, the probability variation function of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Further, as the predetermined number of closing times, “10000 times” may be set that substantially corresponds to the number of times of the fluctuation display until the next big hit occurrence.

  In addition, after the big hit game ends, the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol may operate with or independently of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol. When the variation time reduction function of the special symbol is activated, the average variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol tends to be shortened than usual, and the number of drawing special symbols per unit time is improved (big hit per unit time) Ease of acquisition can be enhanced).

  Furthermore, after the big hit game is over, the electric chew support function may be activated in addition to or independently of the variation time reduction function of the special symbol. The electric chew support function increases the ease of entering the second starting opening 52 by activating the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol, and the open extension function of the ordinary electric character 522 It is a state (it is also called "the ball entry easy state"). In addition, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol is activated, the winning probability of the normal symbol is higher than the normal state. When the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol is activated, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened. When the open time extension function of the ordinary electric jack 522 is activated, the open time of the ordinary electric jack 522 is extended beyond the normal state. In this easy-to-enter-to-the-ball state, the possibility of increasing the number of times of variation of the normal symbol per fixed time is increased more than usual, and also the ease of entering the second starting opening 52 is improved. The possibility of increasing the number of ball entry also increases. Therefore, as a result of the chance to obtain a winning ball by entering the second starting opening 52 during that period by the operation of the electric chew support function, it is possible to continue the game with almost no reduction in holding balls. Become. That is, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of firing balls of the game balls, is increased. Hereinafter, the state in which the electric chow support function is operating is referred to as "high base state", and the state in which the electric chow support function is not operated is referred to as "low base state".

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in the stop mode indicating a small hit, the game is shifted to a small hit game having a lower degree of profit than the above-mentioned big hit game. In this small hit game, an opening and closing operation is performed to change the large winning opening 54 into an open state only once or a plurality of times. When a game ball having a specified count number enters the big winning opening 54 or the opening time of the big winning opening 54 reaches the opening limit time, the small hit game is ended.

<Main functional configuration of pachinko gaming machine>
Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly, the main control board 100 / the effect control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the functional block diagram of FIG. 4 additionally.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 is a ball entry determination means 110, a game lottery random number generation means 120, a hold control means 130, an advance determination means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, an ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145, The special game control unit 150, the symbol display control unit 155, the electric role control unit 160, the game state control unit 165, the error monitoring control unit 170, the main information storage unit 180, and the command transmission / reception unit 190. The above-described units in the main control board 100 are constituted by the main CPU 101, the ROM 102, the RAM 103, the hardware such as the electronic circuit provided on the main control board 100, and the software such as the control program stored in the ROM 102 or the like. Is a functional expression of

  The ball entry determination means 110 detects from the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the special winning port switch 541, the general winning port switch 611, the combination operation gate switch 911, 921 etc. Based on the signal, it is determined that the game ball has entered the winning opening. When the ball entering determination means 110 detects the ball entering of the gaming ball with the first starting port switch 511, it generates an effect control command (referred to as "first starting port winning command") indicating that fact, and 2 When entering the game ball is detected by the start opening switch 521, the effect control command (referred to as "second start opening winning command") indicating that is generated and the operation gate switch 531 of the game ball If passage is detected, an effect control command (referred to as “operation gate winning command”) indicating that effect is generated, and if entry of the game ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 541, this is indicated When an effect control command (referred to as "big winning opening winning command") is generated and entry of the game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 611, an effect control command ("general winning opening winning command" indicating that effect When the passage of the game ball is detected by the combination operation gate switch 911, 921), the effect control command ("combination operation gate winning command" is referred to) indicating that is generated This is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The game lottery random number generation means 120 is used for the success or failure lottery of the special symbol by taking in the built-in random number generated by the random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer 110 by software and adding the soft random number per special symbol described later to this. Generate a random number per special symbol. In addition, the game lottery random number generation means 120 is provided with a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters play a role as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. This software random number is a soft random number per special symbol added to the above-mentioned built-in random number for generating a random number per hit, and an initial value for new update being made after updating of one cycle of soft random number per special symbol is completed Special initial pattern random number per symbol to determine the special pattern, stop symbol of the special symbol Hit the symbol (combination of symbols will be activated condition device) special symbol stop symbol random number, special symbol stop symbol random number Special symbol stop symbol initial value random number to determine the initial value for new update to be made after update of one cycle of is finished, special symbol variation pattern random number for use in selection of variation pattern of special symbol, Normal random number per symbol for use in the lottery of normal symbols, an initial value for new update being made after updating of one cycle of random number per symbol is completed Determining normal symbol per initial value random number for, and the like normal symbol variation pattern random number for use in selecting the change pattern of the normal symbol. These software random numbers are updated once (increment, decrement, addition of prime numbers, etc.) each time timer interrupt processing occurs, and while timer interrupt processing is not being performed for initial value random numbers ( Also during loop processing) update using the remaining time of the interrupt cycle.

  The suspension control means 130 includes a special symbol suspension control means 131 and a regular symbol suspension control means 132.

  Special symbol retention control means 131 is a random number value for a special symbol, which is a random number for drawing a special symbol game, triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 51 or the second starting opening 52. The symbol random number value and the special symbol variation pattern random number value are acquired, and the random number value is managed as the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol retention control means 131 is a main information storage means by combining the operation retention ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to the predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) respectively with the entering sequence of the retention balls. Temporarily store the 180 first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area.

  The first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area, in the order of entry to the starting openings 51 and 52, hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area), hold 2 storage area (2 A first pending storage area), a pending 3 storage area (third pending storage area), and a pending 4 storage area (fourth pending storage area) are provided. Each pending storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a special symbol random number per special symbol, and a special symbol variation pattern random number as a set of operation pending ball information. The operation holding ball information is stored in order of holding 1 storage area, holding 2 storage area, holding 3 storage area, holding 4 storage area, while holding 1 storage area, holding 2 storage area, holding 3 storage area, holding 4 storage Digested in order of area (first in first out principle). In addition, when the holding ball information of the holding 1 storage area is digested, the holding ball information stored in the holding 2 storage area, the holding 3 storage area, and the holding 4 storage area is shifted to the lower number storage area, Clear the contents of the pending 4 storage area to zero.

  Also, the special symbol suspension control means 131 is a first special symbol suspension ball number counter for counting the number of operation suspension balls of the first special symbol, and a second for counting the operation suspension ball number of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol holding ball number counter. The special symbol holding control means 131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one operation holding ball of the special symbol is acquired, and one operation holding ball is digested, as update processing of the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by one.

  Also, when the special symbol retention control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, an effect control command ("symbol storage") including update information of the number of pending balls. To generate a "number command" and temporarily store it in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This one command includes information of both the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol.

  The special symbol suspension control means 131 digests the operation suspension ball (first operation suspension ball) of the first special symbol when the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol described later is satisfied, and the second special symbol described later When the fluctuation start condition of is satisfied, the second special symbol of the operation reserving ball (the first operation reserving ball) is digested. In this embodiment, the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 71 is executed separately and independently by the determination of the variation start condition of the first special symbol and the determination of the variation start condition of the second special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol display device 72 is configured to perform in parallel the variable display of the second special symbol display. In other words, by separately and separately digesting the operation-retention ball of the first special symbol and the operation-retention ball of the second special symbol, for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the corresponding lottery or the variation display corresponding to each. So-called parallel models are adopted in parallel. Therefore, even if the variation display of one of the special symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed for a long time, the variation display of the other special symbol is performed in parallel with the variation display of the one special symbol. Is performed, while the variation display of one special symbol is performed, the variation display of the other special symbol does not get stuck.

  The normal symbol holding control means 132 is a random number value per symbol, a random number per symbol, a symbol random number per symbol, and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern, which are lottery random values relating to a normal symbol game triggered by the game ball entering the operation gate 53. The random number value is acquired, and the random number value is normally managed as the operation pending ball information of the symbol. The normal symbol holding control means 132 combines the normal holding symbol with the normal ball holding storage area of the main information storage means 180 in a form combining the normal holding symbol with the ball holding order up to a predetermined upper limit number (4). Temporarily store. Also, the normal symbol holding control means 132 has a normal symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the normal symbol. The normal symbol holding control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one normal operating symbol holding ball is acquired as an update process of the number of operating normal symbol holding balls, and one operating holding ball is digested. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by one.

  The prior determination means 135 performs the prior determination for the prefetch notice for the operation reserved ball, when the operation reserved ball of the special symbol is acquired at a predetermined prior determined timing. As an example of the above-mentioned pre-determination timing, when (1) is waiting for each operation, and when the electric chow support function is not activated and the operation reserved ball of the first special symbol is acquired, (2) is waiting for each, and If the operation support ball of the second special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is in operation, (3) any of the cases where the operation suspension ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the big hit, middle or small hit, It is time to satisfy the condition. The above predetermination timing is an example, and the predetermination timing is changed according to the specification of the gaming machine (for example, it has a starting opening according to the second special symbol having no ordinary electric role, and eight pieces are normally reserved) In the model in which is stored, the above (1) may be applied not only to the first special symbol but also to the second special symbol, etc.) or a specification may be adopted which performs prior determination at any time without providing prior determination timing. In addition, only the operation reserve ball of the special symbol of the person who plays the main role of the game in each gaming state may be a target of prior determination, for example, in the normal gaming state, only the operation suspension ball of the first special symbol is a target of prior determination In the time-saving game state, the latent probability variation gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state, it is preferable to set only the operation holding ball of the second special symbol as the target of the prior determination. Specifically, the prior determination means 135 reads the random number value corresponding to the operation reserve ball acquired this time from the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180, Pre-judgment (success or failure pre-judgment), pre-judgment of symbol (pre-judgement of symbol), pre-judgment of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern pre-judgement) are sequentially executed. Although the preliminary determination table used in each preliminary determination is not shown, a table for determining prioritization, a table for prior determination of symbols, and a table for prior determination of fluctuation patterns is divided into a plurality of areas. For each of the areas (determination numbers), a lottery ID (a number indicating the result of the prior determination (also referred to as a "predetermination number")) is assigned. Therefore, the result of this prior determination is in accordance with the result of the main lottery by the special symbol lottery processing means 140 described later (the result of the determination of success or failure, the result of the symbol determination, the result of the variation pattern determination). It should be noted that the table for the preliminary determination of acceptance or failure, the table for preliminary determination of symbol, etc. may be the same as the lottery table for acceptance or failure, etc. Here, in the variation pattern prior determination table, there is a possibility that the gaming situation (presence or absence of definite variation, presence or absence of time reduction, whether or not during limited frequency period referring to special table, etc. number of holding balls) may change From the point of view, as described above, it is desirable to determine which of the plurality of regions is included. In addition, as a modification, it is configured to determine in advance a random number value such as a register on main CPU 101 temporarily stored before storing in the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area described above You may Then, the prior determination means 135 sequentially generates a presentation control command (referred to as a “prior determination command”) including information on the result of the prior determination (the prior determination number), and this is used as a command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store in

  Special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes special symbol suitability determination means 141, special symbol stop symbol determination means 412, and special symbol variation pattern determination means 143. The special symbol lottery processing means 140, when the variation start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, per random special symbol stored in the first storage area (pending 1 storage area) of the special symbol holding storage area in the main information storage means 180 The numerical value, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number are read out and stored in the special symbol judgment area, the special symbol judgment region, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment region of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, "the first special symbol variation start condition" means that (A1) jackpot middle or small hit is not in progress, (A2) the first special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, (A3) first special It is that there is an operation holding ball of the design. When all the conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the first special symbol is in a state in which the fluctuation start is possible (a state in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied). On the other hand, "the change start condition of the second special symbol" means (B1) not a big hit in middle or small hit, (B2) a second special symbol is waiting for change, (B3) a second special symbol There is an operation holding ball of. When all the conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the second special symbol is in a state in which the fluctuation start is possible (a state in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied).

  The special symbol compliance determination means 141 reads out the random value per special symbol from the special symbol compliance determination area of the main information storage means 180 and executes the compliance determination, and the determination result corresponds to any of big hit, small hit, and off Decide what to do. The result of this success or failure judgment is temporarily stored in the special symbol judgment flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, off data “00H”), and used in the subsequent processing It is cleared at the time of the stop of the change of the special symbol. Special symbol propriety determination means 141 holds a special symbol propriety lottery table which is referred to at the time of this determination.

  Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the special symbol odds lottery table. In the figure, (A) is referred to in the gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated, and (B) is in the gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated. Is referred to in. In the special symbol qualification lottery table, the random number range of the random value per special symbol is associated with the result of the qualification determination (big hit, small hit, off). As shown in FIG. 5, in the case of gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not operating in the success or failure judgment of the special symbol, the random value per special symbol is in the range of “0 to 204” If the game condition (high probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated is a big hit if it falls under the case, the random number per special symbol falls into the range of “0 to 818” and the big hit It becomes. That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the winning probability of the big hit is varied from the low probability "1/320" to the high probability "1/80". As described above, the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the gaming state, but the winning probability of the big hit is designed to be equal between the pass / fail judgment of the first special symbol and the pass / fail judgment of the second special symbol. Here, even if the result of the success or failure judgment does not fall under the jackpot, in the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol, it wins a small hit with a relatively high probability of 1 / 1.1. The small hit winning probability is designed to be the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state). In this embodiment, small hits are set only for the pass / fail judgment of the second special symbol, but for example, small hits are also set for the pass / fail judgment of the first special symbol, and the first pass over the pass / fail judgment for the first special symbol (2) You may be configured to win a small hit with a high probability that the success or failure of the special symbol is determined.

<Big hit no lottery processing>
Here, the big hit non-lottery process will be described as the success or failure determination process of the special symbol. FIG. 6 is a schematic view for explaining the big hit non-lottery process in the present embodiment. In the figure (A), when the first special symbol is in the display of variation of big hit or out, "O", the result that can be derived as a result of the success or failure of the second special symbol × is displayed. In the figure (B), when the second special symbol is in the variation display of big hit, small hit or out, "O" can not be derived the result that can be derived as a result of the determination of the first special symbol The results are indicated by "x".

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the determination of the success or failure of one of the special symbols is a big hit, during the variation display of that special symbol (during a big hit variation display In the case where the other special symbol's success or failure judgment is executed, it is prohibited to derive a big hit as a result of the other special symbol's success or failure judgment, and only a small hit or an outfall is derived. If the other special symbol's result of the success or failure judgment corresponds to a big hit, the result of the success or failure judgment is forcibly replaced from the big hit to the departure. That is, in the special symbol equality lottery table described above, when the gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated, the random value per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 204". In the case, if the result of the determination is forced to go out (replaced from a big hit) and it is a gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability change function of the special symbol is operating, the randomness per special symbol When the numerical value falls within the range of “0 to 818”, the result of the determination on the correspondence is forcibly left (replacement from the big hit to the left). In addition, as a modification thereof, in addition to the above special symbol conformity lottery table, a table for a big hit no lottery is prepared which does not include the judgment value (random number range) of the big hit as a result of the judgment of the special symbol. During the variation display of the special symbol of the big hit, refer to the table dedicated to the big hit no lottery process instead of the above special symbol hit lottery table and perform the small hit lottery where the result of the pass / fail judgment is only a small hit or a break A method may be adopted. In this modification, as long as a small hit is not set as a result of the pass / fail determination, a method of determining the immediate removal without performing the pass / fail determination may be adopted.

  The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the result of the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 refers to the first special symbol big hit symbol table and the second to be referred to when determining the big hit symbol (big hit type) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It has a special symbol big hit symbol table. In the present embodiment, "specific big hit" means a big hit (probable variation big hit) that triggers the probability change function of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game, and "normal big hit" means the probability change after the big hit game is over It means a big hit (non-probable variation big hit) that does not trigger a function.

  FIG. 7A is a view schematically showing a first special symbol big hit symbol table. In this first special symbol big hit symbol table, symbol group, big hit type, specified number of rounds of big hit game, open time (maximum open time) of big winning opening 54 of each round for special symbol per symbol random number They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol big hit table, four types of big hit types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, it is divided into 10R specific big hit (symbol group A), 4R specific big hit 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific big hit 2 (symbol group C), and 4R normal big hit (symbol group D). In the 10R specific big hit (design group A), the prescribed number of rounds of the big hit game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. 4R specific big hit 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific big hit 2 (symbol group C) and 4R normal big hit (symbol group D), the number of defined rounds of the big hit game is 4 rounds, and a big prize in one round game The opening time (maximum opening time) of the mouth 54 is 28 seconds.

  FIG. 7B is a view schematically showing the second special symbol big hit symbol table. In this second special symbol big hit symbol table, symbol group, big hit type, specified number of rounds of big hit game, open time (maximum open time) of big winning opening 54 of each round for special symbol per pattern random number They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol big hit table, five types of big hit types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, 10R specific big hit (symbol group E), 6R specific big hit (symbol group F), 4R specific big hit 1 (pattern group G), 4R specific big hit 2 (pattern group H), 2R normal big hit (Symbol group I). In the 10R specific big hit (design group E), the prescribed number of rounds of the big hit game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. In the 6R specific big hit (symbol group F), the prescribed number of rounds of the big hit game is 6 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. 4R specific big hit 1 (pattern group G) and 4R specific big hit 2 (pattern group H), the number of defined rounds of the big hit game is 4 rounds, and the opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game (maximum opening time ) Is 28 seconds. In the 2R normal big hit (symbol group I), the prescribed number of rounds of the big hit game is 2 rounds, and the open time (maximum open time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 2 seconds.

  Among the various big hit types, each big hit except the 2R normal big hit is an opportunity that a long open round game in which the big winning opening 54 opens for a long time (28 seconds) is executed in all round games in the big hit game. It is a big hit. On the other hand, the 2R normal big hit is a big hit that triggers a short open round game in which the big winning opening 54 opens for a short time (2 seconds) in all round games in the big hit game. In the present embodiment, the long open round game has an open time of the big winning opening 54, which allows the large winning opening 54 to enter a predetermined number (full count: 10 balls) of game balls or is set to be easy to enter. It is a game. The short opening round game is a round game in which the opening time of the big winning opening 54 is set to be impossible or difficult to enter a predetermined number (full count: 10 balls) of gaming balls in the big winning opening 54.

  In addition, although illustration is omitted, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a small hit, one small hit symbol (symbol group) is selected from a plurality of small hit symbols (symbol group), and the second 2 The selected small hit symbol (pattern group) is to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variation display of the special symbol. In addition, according to the kind of this small hitting design, it is possible to constitute so that opening and closing pattern (opening time and opening frequency) of large winning a prize mouth 54 in small hitting game differs.

  Subsequently, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a transition diagram of the gaming state and the effect mode in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, a normal gaming state, a time saving gaming state, a latent probability variation gaming state, and a probability variation gaming state are set as a plurality of types of gaming states. The game state in which (1) probability fluctuation function of special symbol, fluctuation time shortening function of special symbol and electric Chu support function are activated as the type of the game state is called "probability state" or "probability state game state", 2) A game state in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the power support function is not activated is called "latency probability change gaming state" or "latency probability change state", and (3) special The gaming state in which the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chow support function operate without the probability fluctuation function of the symbol operating is called "time saving state" or "time saving gaming state", and (4) all functions are activated The state which is not done is called "normal state" or "normal game state". Here, it can be said that the "probable variation gaming state", the "hidden probability variation gaming state" and the "time-saving gaming state" are all advantageous gaming states for the player compared to the "normal gaming state". In addition, each gaming state is the combination of the operating state (high probability state / low probability state) of the probability variation function of the special symbol and the operating state (high base state / low base state) of the electric chow support function (1 ) Probability game state "high probability high base state", (2) latent probability change game state "high probability low base state", (3) time short game state "low probability high base state", (4) normal gaming state Can be expressed as “low probability low base state”. Here, regarding the variation time shortening function of the special symbol, the variation time of the special symbol of the person who becomes the main player of the game at least in the gaming state may be shortened among the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is operating, in the gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is the main game, the first special symbol The variation time is shortened, and the variation time of the second special symbol should be shortened in the gaming state (time reduction gaming state, latent probability variation gaming state, probability variation gaming state) in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main game .

  FIG. 9 is a schematic view showing a gaming state setting table in the present embodiment. In the gaming state setting table, for each jackpot type (type of symbol group), a gaming state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game is set. In the present embodiment, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is (A) big hit type (type of symbol group) and (B) game when the big hit is won It is set according to the state. In addition, the number of continuations of each gaming state (number of fluctuation display of special symbol) is the number of probability fluctuation (number of probability change operation) that the probability fluctuation function of special symbol operates and fluctuation time when fluctuation time shortening function of special symbol operates It is set based on the number of times of shortening (the number of times of short operation) and the number of times of easy entry into the ball (the number of times of operation of the electric support) that the electric support function is activated.

  In the first special symbol, if you have won "10R specific big hit (symbol group A)", "4R specific big hit 1 (symbol group B)", regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit, after the end of the big hit game The latent probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state. When transitioning to the latent probability change gaming state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number “100 times”, the fluctuation time shortening number “100 times”, and the ball entry easy state number “0 times” are set. Therefore, the latent probability variation gaming state continues until the variation display count of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST count (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST count (100 times), the special When the latent probability change gaming state ends when the variable display count of the symbol reaches the prescribed ST count (100 times), transition to the normal gaming state from the next variable display of the special symbol occurs, and the next big hit occurs When the latent probability change gaming state ends, the game state transitions to the gaming state according to the type (big hit type) of the big hit symbol after the end of the big hit game.

  When "4R specific big hit 2 (design group C)" is won in the first special symbol, the probability change gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game regardless of the playing state at the time of the big hit. When transitioning to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number "100 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the easy entering state number "100 times" are set. Therefore, the probability variation gaming state continues until the variation display count of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST count (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST count (100 times), the special symbol When the probability change gaming state ends when the variable display number of times reaches the prescribed ST number (100 times), transition to the normal gaming state from the fluctuation display of the special symbol of the next time, the probability change by the next big hit occurring When the gaming state ends, the gaming state is shifted to the gaming state according to the type (big hit type) of the big hit symbol after the end of the big hit game.

  In the first special symbol, when "4R normal big hit (symbol group D)" is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit, time saving game state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game. When transitioning to the time saving game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number “0 times”, the fluctuation time shortening number “70 times”, and the easy entering state number “70 times” are set. Therefore, the time saving gaming state continues until the variation display count of the special symbol reaches the specific number (70 times) or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number (70 times), the variation of the special symbol When the time saving game state ends when the number of times of display reaches the specific number of times (70 times), transition to the normal gaming state from the fluctuation display of the special symbol of the next time, and the time saving game state is When it ends, it changes to the game state according to the kind (big hit classification) of the big hit symbol, after the end of the big hit game.

  If you win in the second special symbol "10R specific big hit (symbol group E)", "6R specific big hit (symbol group F)", "4R specific big hit 1 (symbol group G)", the gaming state at the time of the big hit elected Depending on, the game state which is set after the end of that big hit game differs. Specifically, when the gaming state at the time of the big hit is the normal gaming state, the probability change gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game, the gaming state at the time of the big hit is time saving gaming state, the definite variation game When it is in the state or the latent probability change gaming state, the latent probability change gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game. In case of transition to the probability change gaming state after the end of the big hit game, probability fluctuation number "100 times", fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", easy entering game number "100 times" is set, and after the big hit game is over, it is latent When transitioning to the probability variation gaming state, the probability fluctuation number "100 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the ball entry easy state number "0 times" are set. Therefore, the probability variation gaming state continues until the variation display count of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST count (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST count (100 times), the special symbol When the probability change gaming state ends when the variable display number of times reaches the prescribed ST number (100 times), transition to the normal gaming state from the fluctuation display of the special symbol of the next time, the probability change by the next big hit occurring When the gaming state ends, the gaming state is shifted to the gaming state according to the type (big hit type) of the big hit symbol after the end of the big hit game. Similarly, the latent probability variation gaming state continues until the variation display count of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST count (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST count (100 times), and the special When the latent probability change gaming state ends when the variable display count of the symbol reaches the prescribed ST count (100 times), transition to the normal gaming state from the next variable display of the special symbol occurs, and the next big hit occurs When the latent probability change gaming state ends, the game state transitions to the gaming state according to the type (big hit type) of the big hit symbol after the end of the big hit game.

  When "4R specific big hit 2 (design group H)" is won in the second special symbol, the probability change gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game regardless of the playing state at the time of the big hit. When transitioning to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number "100 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the easy entering state number "100 times" are set. Therefore, the probability variation gaming state continues until the variation display count of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST count (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST count (100 times), the special symbol When the probability change gaming state ends when the variable display number of times reaches the prescribed ST number (100 times), transition to the normal gaming state from the fluctuation display of the special symbol of the next time, the probability change by the next big hit occurring When the gaming state ends, the gaming state is shifted to the gaming state according to the type (big hit type) of the big hit symbol after the end of the big hit game.

  In the second special symbol, when "2R normal big hit (symbol group I)" is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit, time saving game state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game. When shifting to the time saving game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number “0 times”, the fluctuation time shortening number “50 times”, and the number of easy entering states “50 times” are set. Therefore, the time saving gaming state continues until the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the specific number (50 times) or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number (50 times), the variation of the special symbol When the time saving game state ends when the number of times of display reaches the specific number of times (70 times), transition to the normal gaming state from the fluctuation display of the special symbol of the next time, and the time saving game state is When it ends, it changes to the game state according to the kind (big hit classification) of the big hit symbol, after the end of the big hit game.

  Here, as described above, the occurrence of the big hit can be a transition trigger of the gaming state, but the occurrence of the small hit does not become a transition trigger of the gaming state. That is, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the special symbol is a small hit, the variation display of the final round that becomes the ending condition of the gaming state (for example, the variation display of 100th rotation of probability variation gaming state and latent probability variation gaming state, time saving game Except for the variation display of the 70th rotation of the state, the gaming state at the time of the small hit is continued as it is, and the transition control of the gaming state is not performed when the small hit is triggered. That is, if the gaming state before the occurrence of the small hit is the normal gaming state, the gaming state during the small hitting game and after the small hitting game also becomes the normal gaming state, and if the gaming state before the occurrence of the small hit is the time saving gaming state, The game state in the small hit game and after the small hit game also becomes short time game state, if the game state before the occurrence of the small hit is a probability change game state, the game state in the small hit game and after the small hit game will also be a definite change game state If the gaming state before occurrence of the small hit is the latent probability changing gaming state, the gaming state during the small hitting game and after the small hitting game also becomes the latent probability changing gaming state.

  In this embodiment, as a gaming state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the normal gaming state, the time saving gaming state, the latent probability changing gaming state, and the positive changing gaming state are also referred to as the “advantage gaming state”.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value. Here, the special symbol variation pattern determination unit 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol, as shown in FIGS. The special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 selects any variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state. The relationship between the variation pattern selection state and the variation pattern table will be described later. In each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation patterns are defined. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, “selectivity” is indicated, but in actuality, the judgment value (range of random number value) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. The variation pattern is determined based on which determination value the variation pattern random value belongs to. It is premised that the variation time of various variation patterns is determined for each variation pattern as the termination condition of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation by the decorative symbol composed of a plurality of symbols is also executed in the variation time. Defined as

  Here, the variation pattern selection state will be described. The variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation pattern table). In this example, “normal selection state”, “limited frequency selection state”, “time saving selection state”, “latency selection state”, and “probability variation selection state” are set as the plurality of types of variation pattern selection states. The normal selection state and the limited frequency selection state are the fluctuation pattern selection states set in the gaming state (normal gaming state) in which neither the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol nor the power chew support function is activated. is there. However, in the limited frequency selection state, when transitioning to the normal gaming state based on the termination of the advantageous gaming state (time saving gaming state, probability variation gaming state, latent probability variation gaming state), a fixed period immediately after shifting to the normal gaming state (Period over the number of times of variation display (4 times) corresponding to the maximum number (4) of operation holding balls of the second special symbol: hereinafter referred to as "limited period") In the variation pattern selection state which is set limitedly is there. Therefore, during the execution of the normal gaming state, the normal selection state is set except for the above-mentioned limited period (period in which the special selection state is set). The time saving selection state is a variation pattern selection state set in the gaming state (time saving gaming state) in which the special symbol's probability fluctuation function does not operate, but the special symbol's fluctuation time shortening function and the power chute support function are activated. . The probability variation selection state is a variation pattern selection state set in the gaming state (probability variation gaming state) in which all of the special symbol probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time shortening function and the power-chute support function are activated. The latent probability selection state is a fluctuation pattern selection state set in the gaming state (latency probability change gaming state) in which the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the power support function is not activated. In this embodiment, although the above-mentioned limited period is set as a period covering variable display of 4 rotations made to correspond to the maximum number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol, it is limited to this configuration Alternatively, for example, it may be set as a period over the variable display of 5 rotations or more.

  In each variation pattern table, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 14, the fields to be referred to for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are different, and it is assumed that the same special symbol variation pattern random number is acquired. Also, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Here, the number of operation pending balls described in each figure (“0 pending”, “1 to 2 pending”, “3 pending”) is the first special symbol variation pattern lottery, It means the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of operation reserved balls after reserve digestion), and if it is the variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol, the number of operation reserved spheres of the second special symbol (after reserve digestion) It means the number of operation holding balls). The number of operation reserving balls is the number of operation reserving balls existing at the time of lottery of the fluctuation pattern (at the start of the fluctuation display / after the reserve digestion) (not including the operation reserving ball digested by the fluctuation display) . In addition, you may use the total value of the number of operation | movement pending balls of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol as the modification. Also, in the limited frequency state, regardless of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern lottery may be performed using a common table.

  The variation representation of the decorative symbol performed in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbol is determined based on the type (variation time) of the variation pattern of the special symbol. 10 to 14 also show the contents of the fluctuation effects set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern (variation time) as a reference. In the figure, in the "super-shortening fluctuation", "shortening fluctuation", and "normal fluctuation", the decorative design of the three lines fluctuates, and it is a rendering that becomes so-called "breakout" in so-called looseness without passing through the reach state once It is. In the following, the ultrashortening fluctuation, the shortening fluctuation and the normal fluctuation are collectively referred to as "non-reach out". In this non-reach deviation, the fluctuation modes differ from each other in that the fluctuation display stops in a shorter time than the fluctuation fluctuation or the ultrashort fluctuation fluctuation than the normal fluctuation fluctuation. “N reach (normal reach)” is the remaining one row (general reach condition) with the same decorative symbol stopped in two rows (generally the left row and the right row) of the three rows of decorative symbols In the middle row, when different decorative symbols are stopped, it becomes "off", and when the same decorative symbol is stopped in one remaining row (generally, middle row), it is an effect that becomes "big hit". “SP reach (super reach)” is a reach production with a relatively high expectation of big hit compared to the above N reach, and it is developed from N reach and, for example, still images and videos such as animation and live-action are displayed It is an effect. The "very long fluctuation" is an effect in which the fluctuation time is set to a very long time. The "immediate hit" is an effect in which the fluctuation time is set to a very short time, and immediately after the start of the fluctuation display, the "big hit" or "small hit" is immediately made without passing through the reach state.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 10 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table 1. The fluctuation pattern table 1 is a fluctuation pattern table which is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently staying is the normal selection state. The fluctuation pattern table 1 is a different table depending on the result of the success or failure judgment (big hit, small hit, or missing).

  In the fluctuation pattern table 1 for outlier, fluctuation patterns PH1-1 (shortened fluctuation), PH1-2 (normal fluctuation), PH1-3 (N reach), PH1-4 (SP reach), PH1-5 (super long) Fluctuation) is set. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a loss, fluctuation pattern PH1-1 (shortened fluctuation), PH1-2 (normal fluctuation), PH1-3 (N reach), PH1-4 (SP reach) ) Is selected. At this time, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is disapproval, the table content of the reference destination is set to be different according to the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern Even if the random number is the same, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set relatively short tends to be selected as the number of operation suspension balls of the first special symbol increases, and the number of operation suspension balls of the first special symbol is The smaller the variation pattern of the first special symbol is, the easier it is to select the variation pattern. On the other hand, when the result of the pass / fail determination of the second special symbol is a loss, the variation pattern PH1-5 (very long variation) is selected. That is, if the result of the determination of the second special symbol is a disapproval, the variation pattern of the selection target becomes fixed (the second special symbol, without depending on the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol) Only the long and long fluctuations are selected.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 1 for the big hit / small hit, fluctuation patterns PA1-1 (N reach), PA1-2 (SP reach), PA1-3 (super long fluctuation), PA1-4 (super long fluctuation), PA1 -5 (very long fluctuation), PA1-6 (very long fluctuation), and PA1-7 (very long fluctuation) are set. Here, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a specific big hit (10R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit 1, 4R specific big hit), fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (SP reach) Is selected, and if the jackpot type is usually a big hit (4R normal big hit), the variation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (very long fluctuation), PA1-4 (very long fluctuation), PA1-5 (super long) regardless of the type of big hit Variation), PA1-6 (very long variation), PA1-7 (very long variation) are selected. In addition, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a small hit, the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (super long fluctuation) is selected. That is, when the result of the judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to a big hit or a small hit, only the super long variation in which the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be extremely long is selected.

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 11 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table 2. The fluctuation pattern table 2 is a fluctuation pattern table which is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the limited frequency selection state. The variation pattern table 2 is a different table depending on the result of the success or failure determination (big hit, small hit, or missing).

  Fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (shortened fluctuation), PH2-2 (normal fluctuation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach) are set in the fluctuation pattern table 2 for outliers. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a loss, fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (shortened fluctuation), PH2-2 (normal fluctuation), PH2-3 (N reach), PH2-4 (SP reach) ) Is selected. At this time, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is disapproval, the table content of the reference destination is set to be different according to the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern Even if the random number is the same, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set relatively short tends to be selected as the number of operation suspension balls of the first special symbol increases, and the number of operation suspension balls of the first special symbol is The smaller the variation pattern of the first special symbol is, the easier it is to select the variation pattern. The variation pattern table 2 and the variation pattern table 1 described above have the same selection tendency of variation time of the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a loss, fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (shortened fluctuation) or PH2-5 (SP reach) does not depend on the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol. It is selected. The fluctuation pattern table 2 is set so that the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is different from that of the fluctuation pattern table 1 described above. That is, in the fluctuation pattern table 2, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened as compared to the fluctuation pattern table 1 described above (relatively short fluctuation time is easily selected).

  In the fluctuation pattern table 2 for the big hit / small hit, fluctuation patterns PA2-1 (per instant), PA2-2 (N reach), and PA2-3 (SP reach) are set. Here, when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a specific big hit (10R specific big hit 1, 4R specific big hit 1, 4R specific big hit 2), fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (SP If reach) is selected and the big hit type is usually big hit (4R normal big hit), the variation pattern PA2-2 (N reach) or PA2-3 (SP reach) is selected. The variation pattern table 2 and the variation pattern table 1 described above have the same selection tendency of the variation time of the big hit of the first special symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a specific big hit (10R specific big hit, 6R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit 1, 4R specific big hit 2), fluctuation pattern PA2-3 If (SP reach) is selected and the big hit type is normally big hit (2R normal big hit), the variation pattern PA2-2 (N reach) or PA2-3 (SP reach) is selected. Moreover, when the result of the pass / fail determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation pattern PA2-1 (immediately hit) is selected. The fluctuation pattern table 2 is set so that the selection tendency of the fluctuation time of the big hit / small hit of the second special symbol is different from that of the fluctuation pattern table 1 described above. That is, in this fluctuation pattern table 2, the fluctuation time of the big hit / small hitting of the second special symbol is shortened compared to the fluctuation pattern table 1 described above (relatively short fluctuation time tends to be selected Yes).

  Here, within the limited period of the normal gaming state in which the variation pattern table 2 is referred to, the average of the variation time of the first special symbol is compared with outside the limited period of the normal gaming state in which the variation pattern table 1 is referred. The values are set to the same value, and the variation efficiency of the first special symbol is designed to be equal. On the other hand, within the limited period of the normal gaming state in which the variation pattern table 2 is referred to, the average value of the variation time of the second special symbol compared to outside the limited period of the normal gaming state in which the variation pattern table 1 is referred. Is set to be short, and the second special symbol is designed to have high fluctuation efficiency (the number of fluctuations per unit time increases).

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 12 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table 3. The fluctuation pattern table 2 is a fluctuation pattern table that is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the time saving selection state. The variation pattern table 3 is a different table depending on the result of the success or failure determination (big hit, small hit, or missing).

  In the fluctuation pattern table 3 for outliers, fluctuation patterns PH3-1 (very shortening fluctuation), PH3-2 (short fluctuation), PH3-3 (normal fluctuation), and PH3-4 (SP reach) are set. Here, when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is disapproval, fluctuation pattern PH3-2 (shortened fluctuation), PH3-3 (normal fluctuation) without depending on the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol , PH3-4 (SP reach) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a loss, fluctuation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), PH3-2 (shortened fluctuation), PH3-3 (normal fluctuation), PH3-4 (SP reach) ) Is selected. At this time, if the result of the determination of the success or failure of the second special symbol is a loss, the number of operation suspension balls of the second special symbol (specifically, depending on the presence or absence of the operation suspension ball of the second special symbol), The table contents are set to be different, and different fluctuation patterns can be selected even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number values are the same. Specifically, the variation time of the second special symbol is more relative to the case where the actuation special ball of the second special symbol is present than the case where the actuation special ball of the second special symbol is not present. It is easy to select the fluctuation pattern set to short.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 3 for the big hit / small hit, fluctuation patterns PA 3-1 (immediately hit) and PA 3-2 (SP reach) are set. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA3-2 (SP reach) is selected without depending on the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA3-2 (SP reach) is selected without depending on the big hit type. On the other hand, when the result of the pass / fail determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation pattern PA3-1 (immediately hit) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 4)
FIG. 13 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table 4. The fluctuation pattern table 4 is a fluctuation pattern table which is set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the latent probability selection state. The variation pattern table 4 is a different table depending on the result of the success or failure determination (big hit, small hit, or missing).

  In the fluctuation pattern table 4 for outliers, fluctuation patterns PH4-1 (very shortening fluctuation) and PH4-2 (SP reach (drawing)) are set. Here, when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is disapproval, the fluctuation pattern PH4-1 (super shortening fluctuation) is selected without depending on the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the result of the determination of the success or failure of the second special symbol is a loss, fluctuation pattern PH4-1 (super shortening fluctuation), PH4-2 (SP reach (SP reach (independent of the second special symbol) Any of the draw) is selected.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 4 for the big hit / small hit, fluctuation patterns PA4-1 (per instant), PA4-2 (SP reach (win)), PA4-3 (SP reach (defeat)), PA4-4 (super Long fluctuation) is set. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA4-4 (super long variation) is selected without depending on the big hit type. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a specific big hit (10R specific big hit, 6R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit 1, 4R specific big hit 2), fluctuation pattern PA4-2 If (SP reach (winning)) is selected and the jackpot type is usually a big hit (2R normal big hit), fluctuation pattern PA4-3 (SP reach (defeat)) is selected. Moreover, when the result of the pass / fail determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation pattern PA4-1 (immediately hit) is selected.

  Here, as the effect contents of the change production described in the figure, “SP reach (win)”, “SP reach (defeat)”, and “SP reach (draw)” all indicate that the ally character is an enemy character. It is a battle reach where the battle production which fights and decides the outcome is developed. That is, in the latent probability variation gaming state in which the fluctuation pattern table 4 is referred to, the battle mode is adopted as the effect mode (small hit RUSH mode described later). In "SP reach (winning)", a teammate character wins an enemy character, and a big hit is determined in the variable display, and the big hit type is won by a specific big hit (a big hit probability is high after the big hit game is over) It becomes a battle effect which suggests or informs that the game state set in is re-entered). In "SP reach (defeat)", a big hit is confirmed in the variable display by the allied character losing to the enemy character, and the big hit type is normally won by big hit (the big hit probability is low after the end of the big hit game) It becomes a battle effect to suggest or notify) to fall into the gaming state set to. The “SP reach (draw)” is a battle effect that suggests or informs that the outset has been determined in the variable display by pulling out the ally character with the enemy character. Therefore, “SP reach (win)” and “SP reach (defeat)” indicate or notify that the latent probability change gaming state is ended by the jackpot being determined in the variable display, the termination indication effect of the latent probability change gaming state (The below-mentioned “latency mode end suggestion effect”) becomes, “SP reach (draw)” is that the latent probability change gaming state continues even after the next variable display when the outset is fixed in the variable display. It is a continuation indication effect of the latent probability variation gaming state to be indicated or notified ("latency mode continuation indication effect" described later). Here, "termination of the latent probability change gaming state" also includes that the latent probability change gaming state is ended once. In other words, when winning in the battle effect, because the big hit game is started, once the big hit game state (normal game state / low probability low base state) is set, but after the end of the big hit game, it will be hidden again Since it will rush into the probability change gaming state (except for "4R specific big hit 2"), it can be said that the above-mentioned latent mode end suggestion effect suggests or notifies that the latent probability change gaming state ends "once" . If you win a big hit other than the 4R specific big hit 2 (a big hit that will trigger a transition to the latent probability change gaming state) among multiple types of specified big hits, you will move to any gaming state after winning in the battle effect If you are notified that you want to transition to the latent probability variation gaming state in the effect to inform you to, if you win the 4R specific big hit 2 (big hit that becomes the transition to probability variation gaming state), after winning in the battle production, It is reported that transition to the probability variation gaming state is made by an effect notifying that which gaming state is transitioned.

(Variation pattern table 5)
FIG. 14 is a schematic view showing the fluctuation pattern table 5. The fluctuation pattern table 5 is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state currently in stay is the probability variation selection state. The variation pattern table 5 is a different table depending on the result of the success or failure determination (big hit, small hit, or off).

  In the fluctuation pattern table 5 for outliers, fluctuation patterns PH5-1 (very short fluctuation), PH5-2 (short fluctuation), PH5-3 (normal fluctuation), and PH5-4 (SP reach) are set. Here, when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is disapproval, fluctuation pattern PH5-2 (shortened fluctuation), PH5-3 (normal fluctuation) without depending on the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol , PH5-4 (SP reach) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a loss, fluctuation pattern PH5-1 (very shortening fluctuation), PH5-2 (short fluctuation), PH5-3 (normal fluctuation), PH5-4 (SP reach) ) Is selected. At this time, if the result of the determination of the success or failure of the second special symbol is a loss, the number of operation suspension balls of the second special symbol (specifically, depending on the presence or absence of the operation suspension ball of the second special symbol), The table contents are set to be different, and different fluctuation patterns can be selected even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number values are the same. Specifically, the variation time of the second special symbol is more relative to the case where the actuation special ball of the second special symbol is present than the case where the actuation special ball of the second special symbol is not present. It is easy to select the fluctuation pattern set to short.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 5 for the big hit / small hit, fluctuation pattern PA5-1 (per instant), PA5-2 (per instant), PA5-3 (SP reach (win)), PA5-4 (SP reach (defeat) ) Is set. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA5-2 (immediately hit) is selected without depending on the big hit type. On the other hand, if the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a specific big hit (10R specific big hit, 6R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit 1, 4R specific big hit 2), fluctuation pattern PA5-3 If (SP reach (winning)) is selected and the jackpot type is usually a big hit (2R normal big hit), a fluctuation pattern PA5-4 (SP reach (defeat)) is selected. Moreover, when the result of the pass / fail determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation pattern PA5-1 (immediately hit) is selected.

  Here, as the effect contents of the change production described in the figure, “SP reach (win)”, “SP reach (defeat)”, and “SP reach (draw)” all indicate that the ally character is an enemy character. It is a battle reach where the battle production which fights and decides the outcome is developed. That is, in the probability variation gaming state in which the variation pattern table 5 is referred to, the battle mode is adopted as the effect mode (a probability variation mode described later). In "SP reach (winning)", a teammate character wins an enemy character, and a big hit is determined in the variable display, and the big hit type is won by a specific big hit (a big hit probability is high after the big hit game is over) It becomes a battle effect which suggests or informs that the game state set in is re-entered). In "SP reach (defeat)", a big hit is confirmed in the variable display by the allied character losing to the enemy character, and the big hit type is normally won by big hit (the big hit probability is low after the end of the big hit game) It becomes a battle effect to suggest or notify) to fall into the gaming state set to. The “SP reach (draw)” is a battle effect that suggests or informs that the outset has been determined in the variable display by pulling out the ally character with the enemy character. Here, in the case of winning a big hit other than the 4R specific big hit 2 (a big hit serving as a trigger for transition to the latent probability change gaming state) among multiple types of specified big hits, after winning in the battle effect, to any gaming state If it is notified that it will shift to the latent probability variation gaming state by the effect to notify whether it shifts, and it is won after the battle effect if it is won by the 4R specific big hit 2 (big hit serving as the transition to the probability variation gaming state) It is reported that transition to the probability change gaming state is made by an effect to notify to which gaming state. In addition, SP reach (refer to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) executed when the gaming state is the latent probability variation gaming state or the probability variation gaming state and executed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state The SP reach (see FIGS. 10 to 12) is an SP reach having different presentation contents. In other words, the SP reach executed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the short time gaming state is merely an effect content that suggests or informs that the big hit expectation is relatively high, whereas the gaming state is latent. The SP reach executed in the case of the probability variation gaming state or the probability variation gaming state has effect contents for suggesting or notifying the presence or absence of the big hit and the type of the big hit according to the effect result.

  As described above, in the fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 5, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is specified for each fluctuation pattern, however, even when any fluctuation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time of the special symbol (decided display time ) Is set to "0.5 seconds". In addition, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the special symbol is the time when the special symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is held). In addition, the fluctuation time and the fixed stop time of the decorative symbol are also set corresponding to the fluctuation time and the fixed stop time of such a special symbol. In addition, as a modification of the fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 5 (FIGS. 10 to 14), in the above embodiment, even if the number of operation reserved balls of the special symbol is zero, super shortening fluctuation and shortening fluctuation may be selected. Although it is comprised as mentioned above, when the number of operation holding balls of a special symbol is 0, it may be constituted so that super shortening variation and shortening variation may not be chosen. Further, as a modification of the fluctuation pattern table 1 (FIG. 10), in the above embodiment, the fluctuation time value at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol is plural, and the fluctuation time value at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol is 1 Although there are only one, the variation time value at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol may be one, and there may be multiple variation time values at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol, or the big hit at the second special symbol. There may be a plurality of fluctuation time values and a small hitting fluctuation time value. Further, as a modification of the fluctuation pattern tables 3 to 5 (FIGS. 12 to 14), in the above embodiment, fluctuation patterns (variation time value, effect at the time of big hit of the first special symbol in the fluctuation pattern tables 3 to 5) The contents are different from each other, but the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the fluctuation pattern tables 3 to 5 is always by the immediate hit (the sudden hit of stopping the second special symbol fluctuation production) It may be a variation pattern of 2 seconds without effect (may be configured with a common variation pattern (variation time value, effect content)). In addition, the fluctuation pattern (variation time value, effect contents) and selection rate at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the fluctuation pattern table 3 (Figure 12), the first in the fluctuation pattern tables 4 to 5 (Figures 13 to 14) It may be applied to the variation pattern (variation time value, effect contents) and the selection rate at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In addition, the fluctuation pattern (variation time value, effect contents) and the selection rate at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the fluctuation pattern table 4 (Figure 13), the first in the fluctuation pattern table 3, 5 (Figure 12, Figure 14) It may be applied to the variation pattern (variation time value, effect contents) and the selection rate at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In addition, the fluctuation pattern (variation time value, effect contents) and selection rate at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the fluctuation pattern table 5 (Figure 14), the first in the fluctuation pattern tables 3 to 4 (Figures 12 to 13) It may be applied to the variation pattern (variation time value, effect contents) and the selection rate at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In addition, the effect contents at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the fluctuation pattern table 3 (Figure 12) may be without effect, in which case the effect that suddenly hit a big hit after 30 seconds of fluctuation display (suddenly And, if the present is a second special symbol in the variation display, it may be a sudden hit by stopping the effect relating to the second special symbol variation display). In addition, with regard to fluctuation pattern table 3 (Fig. 12) and fluctuation pattern table 5 (Fig. 14), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) at the time of small hitting of the second special symbol is one kind of fluctuation pattern (one kind of fluctuation time) However, a plurality of these may be provided. In addition, in the short game state and the probability change game state where these fluctuation pattern tables 3 and 5 are referred to, even if the small hitting fluctuation display is executed, the game ball is made to enter the big winning opening 54 in the small hitting game. Because it becomes difficult situation, it does not notify that it is winning small hit or small hitting game, it is like the out-of-order fluctuation display as production, small time in the short time game state and the probability game state For the fluctuation display, the fluctuation time value may be different according to the number of operation holding balls in the same manner as the out-of-the-valley display, for example, "9 seconds" in the case of 0 operation holding balls, operation It may be "4 seconds" when the number of holding balls is one to two, and may be "0.5 seconds" when the number of operation holding balls is three. It is desirable that the sum of the fluctuation time value and the execution time of the small hit game be deviated from the deviation time value to approximate the fluctuation time value of the fluctuation display as if it were one time of the fluctuation display.

  Further, after the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 selects the variation pattern of the special symbol, in order to instruct the effect control substrate 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol, communication with the effect control substrate 200 is normally performed. Effect control command (communication inspection command) for confirming whether or not the effect control command (variation additional information specification command) including fluctuation additional information (information for adding / subtracting fluctuation time), effects including fluctuation pattern information Generate control command (variation pattern specification command), effect control command (pattern specification command) including information of character effect number (pattern group and gaming state), etc. And store it in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 includes an ordinary symbol suitability determination means 146, an ordinary symbol stop symbol determination means 147, and an ordinary symbol variation pattern determination means 148. The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 reads out the random symbol value per normal symbol and the normal symbol variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area in the normal symbol storage area when the variation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, The main symbol storage area 180 is stored in the normal symbol suitability determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area, respectively. Here, FIG. 15 is a schematic view for explaining the normal symbol lottery. In the figure, (A) shows a normal symbol acceptance lottery table, (B) shows a normal symbol variation pattern table, and (C) shows a normal electric character opening pattern table. Here, "a variation start condition of a normal symbol" means (a) waiting for a variation of a normal symbol, and (b) that there is an operation retaining ball of a normal symbol. When all the conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a state in which fluctuation start is possible (state in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied).

  The normal symbol suitability determination means 146 reads out the random value per normal symbol from the normal symbol suitability determination area of the main information storage means 180 and executes the yes / no determination, and the determination result corresponds to either hit or off. decide. The result of this success / failure determination is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180 and used in the subsequent processing, and then cleared when the variation of the normal symbol stops. As shown in FIG. 15 (A), the normal symbol compliance determination means 146 holds a normal symbol compliance lottery table which is referred to in the determination of the regular symbol. The hit probability of the normal symbol is set to "1 / 1.02" when the electronic chew support function (normal pattern probability change function) is not activated, and the electronic chew support function (normal pattern probability change function) is When operating, it is set to "1 / 1.01". Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state, the contact is derived with a very high probability in the success / failure determination of the normal symbol.

  The normal symbol stop symbol judging means 147 refers to a normal symbol stop symbol table (not shown), and when the result of the normal symbol judgment is a hit, a predetermined hit symbol (a trigger for activating the ordinary electric symbol 522) If the result of the normal / non-defective determination is out, the predetermined out-of-pattern (out-of-hand pattern that does not trigger the operation of the ordinary electric character 522) is assigned. In this embodiment, as a hit symbol of the normal symbol which becomes a trigger for the normal electric character 522 to operate, for example, it has three types of symbols (combination of symbols) such as the normal symbol A, the normal symbol B and the normal symbol C .

  The normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148 reads out the normal symbol variation pattern random number value from the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 and refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table to change the variation pattern of the normal symbol (variation time To determine). As shown in FIG. 15 (B), the normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148 holds the normal symbol variation pattern table to be referred to when determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol. The fluctuation time of the normal pattern is set to "0.5 seconds" when the electric chew support function (normal pattern fluctuation time shortening function) is not activated, and the electric chew support function (normal pattern fluctuation time shortening function) Is set to "0.2 seconds". That is, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a very short time. In addition, even when the fluctuation pattern of any normal symbol is selected, "0.1 second" is set as the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol. In addition, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of a normal symbol is a time when a normal symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (time in which a completely stopped state is held).

  In addition, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145 determines the open pattern (open time) of the normal electric power combination 522 in accordance with the result of the normal pattern judgment. The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 holds, as shown in FIG. 15C, the ordinary electric character opening pattern table to be referred to when determining the opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric power combination 522. . The opening pattern of the ordinary electric boat 522 is “Open for 1 second → Close for 2 seconds → Open for 1 second → Close for 2 seconds → Close for 1 second if the electric support function (Open extension function) is not activated It is set to "open", and is set to "open for 5.9 seconds" when the power chew support function (open extension function) is activated. That is, in the low base state, the opening operation for 1 second is performed three times in the low base state as the opening pattern of the ordinary motorized part, and the total opening time is "3 seconds", and in the high base state, the opening time is 5.9 seconds. Since the operation is performed only once, the total open time is "5.9 seconds".

  In the special game control means 150, when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit, according to the determined big hit type (symbol groups A to I), the execution time (demonstration time) of the big hit start demonstration and the big hit end demonstration, Determine the round game execution time (round time). Then, the special game control means 150 instructs the effect control board 200 side to execute an effect control command (referred to as a "big hit start demo command") instructing execution of the big hit start demonstration effect and execution of the big hit end demonstration effect The effect control command (referred to as a “big hit end demo command”) to be generated is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. The jackpot start demo command is also a trigger for determining the contents of a series of jackpots during the jackpot game (jackpot start demonstration, round director, jackpot end demonstration) on the side of the production control board 200. Become. In addition, the special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as “round effect specification command”) for instructing the start of the round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game in the big hit game. This is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. The round presentation designation command includes information on the current number of rounds and information on the opening and closing of the big winning opening 54 and the like. In addition, regarding execution time (demonstration time) of big hit start demonstration and big hit end demonstration, not only big hit classification (symbol group A-I), same big hit classification (symbol group A according to game state at the time of big hit election) Even if ~ I), the execution time (demonstration time) of the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo may be made different.

  Further, the special game control means 150 determines the execution time (demonstration time) of the small hit start demonstration and the small hit end demonstration when the result of the success or failure judgment is a small hit. In addition, special game control means 150, production control command ("small hitting start demonstration command") which instructs execution of small hitting start demonstration production, production control command which instructs execution of small hitting end demonstration production ("small hitting An end demonstration command “) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 variably displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 71 in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and confirms the first special symbol after the variation display. Let Further, the special symbol display control means 156 causes the second special symbol to be variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 72 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is displayed after the variation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, final display time) relating to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operation states of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage unit 180. The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm the display of the decorative symbol at the time of stopping the variation of the special symbol (that is, at the timing when the value of the special symbol gaming timer becomes "0"). To generate an effect control command (referred to as a "variable stop command"). The ordinary symbol display control means 157 causes the ordinary symbol to be variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 75 in accordance with the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol, and also causes the ordinary symbol to be determined and displayed after the fluctuation display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, final display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operation state of the normal symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage unit 180.

Simultaneous change processing
Here, the simultaneous variation processing (variation suspension processing, variation forced stop processing) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram for explaining the simultaneous variation processing (variation suspension processing, variation forced stop processing) according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, as described above, the first special symbol display device 71 is executed separately and independently by the determination of the variation start condition of the first special symbol and the determination of the variation start condition of the second special symbol. A specification (a so-called parallel machine specification) is adopted in which the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 72 are simultaneously performed in parallel. In other words, by separately and separately digesting the operation-retention ball of the first special symbol and the operation-retention ball of the second special symbol, for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the corresponding lottery or the variation display corresponding to each. Etc. in parallel. Therefore, even if the variation display of one of the special symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed for a long time, the variation display of the other special symbol is performed in parallel with the variation display of the one special symbol. Is performed, while the variation display of one special symbol is performed, the variation display of the other special symbol does not get stuck. In the following, regarding the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variation display of the big hit is referred to as "big hit variation display", and the variation display of the small hit is referred to as "small hit variation display" The fluctuation display of is referred to as "outside fluctuation display".

«Change suspension process»
Here, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of one of the special symbols is a big hit variation display, a small hitting variation display, or an outlier variation display, and the other special symbol variation display is a small hitting variation display In the case where the variation display of one special symbol and the small hit variation display of the other special symbol are being executed in parallel, the variation display of one of the special symbols is finished before the other is finished. When the small hit variation display of the special symbol is finished, the variation display of one of the special symbols is interrupted from the end of the small hit variation display of the other special symbol to the end of the small hit game (( Measurement of fluctuation time according to fluctuation display of one special symbol is interrupted). Note that the suspension of the variable display is used in the meaning of temporarily stopping the variable display (meaning that it is scheduled to be resumed later). And when the small hit game of the other special symbol is finished, the measurement of the fluctuation time concerning the fluctuation display of one special symbol is resumed, and the measurement time of fluctuation time before resumption and the measurement time of fluctuation time after resumption When the total addition time reaches a predetermined fluctuation time (variation time as designed), the fluctuation display of one special symbol is ended.

«Changed forced stop processing»
On the other hand, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of one of the special symbols is a big hit variation display, and the variation display of the other special symbol is a small hit variation display or a out variation display, Under the situation where the big hit variation display of the special symbol and the small hit variation display or the out-of-out variation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, the small hit variation display or the out-of-out variation display of the other special symbol ends Before, when the big hit variation indication of one special symbol is finished, the measurement time of the small hitting variation indication of the other special symbol or the outset variation indication is specified fluctuation time which is set beforehand (the fluctuation time according to the design value) Even before reaching the end of the big hit variation display of one of the special symbols, it is forced to end the small hit variation display or the off variation display of the other special symbol in conjunction or in synchronization with it. That. In addition, when forced termination of the small hit variation display of the other special symbol, the symbol (decided display symbol) to be stopped at the end of the small hit variation display shall be replaced from the small hit symbol with a symbol . That is, the small hit variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the outset change display (as a result, the small hit game is canceled). Thus, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special game (big hit game) in one special symbol and the special game (small hit game) in the other special symbol conflict with each other. In addition, when the fluctuation display of one of the special symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts as a big hit fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol that starts fluctuation after that is other than the big hit fluctuation display Variable display (in other words, out-of-out change display or small hit change display, if it is a success or failure random number corresponding to a big hit in the success or failure determination process, the result of the success or failure determination is replaced by out) Is desirable. In addition, when the fluctuation display of one of the special symbols starts as a big hit fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol that starts fluctuation after that is the out-of-out fluctuation display (probability corresponding to the big hit or small hit in the judgment process) In the case of a random number, the result of judgment of acceptance may be forcibly replaced by outliers, and may be displayed as outliers.

  In addition, as a modification of the above-mentioned fluctuation forced stop processing, at the end of the big hit fluctuation indication of one special symbol, it is not forced to end the small hitting fluctuation indication or the outlier fluctuation indication of the other special symbol, but one special Between the end of the big hit variation display of the symbol and the end of the big hit game, the small hit variation display or the off variation display of the other special symbol is suspended (measurement of the variation time according to the variation display of the other special symbol) It may be configured to be interrupted. And when the big hit game of one special symbol is finished, the small hit fluctuation display or the outlier fluctuation display of the other special symbol is resumed, and the measurement time of fluctuation time before resumption and the measurement time of fluctuation time after resumption Even if it is configured to end the small hit variation display or the out-of-range variation display of the other special symbol when the total time with the reaches the preset specified variation time (variation time as designed value). Good.

  If the result of the lottery of special symbol is a big hit, the electric role control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric role solenoid as a big hit game processing after the final display of the special symbol, and the special electric role The object 542 is opened in accordance with a predetermined actuation pattern. In the jackpot game, one opening and closing operation of the special electric character 542 is regarded as one round game (unit game), and the round game is executed continuously for the prescribed number of rounds. The motorized prize control means 160 holds a special winning opening open counter for storing the number of times of operation of the special motorized prize 542 (ie, the number of rounds being executed). Here, with the operation termination condition (end condition of unit game) of the special electric symbol 542 in the big hit game, the game ball of the prescribed count number ("10" in this embodiment) enters the large winning opening 54 Or, the opening time of the big winning opening 54 has reached the open limit time ("28 seconds", "2 seconds" in the present embodiment).

  In addition, when the result of the lottery of special symbol turns into a small hit, the electric role control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric position solenoid 543 as small hitting game processing after the final display of the special symbol. , The special motorized symbol 542 is opened for a short time (1.8 seconds). Small hit games are distinguished from big hit games that consist of multiple round games in that they consist of one round game. Here, with the closing condition of the large winning opening 54 (small playing condition ending condition) in the small hitting game, gaming balls of a prescribed count number ("10" in this embodiment) entered the large winning opening 54. Or, the opening time of the big winning opening 54 has reached the opening limit time ("1.8 seconds" in the present embodiment).

  In addition, when the result of the normal / non-defective determination of the normal symbol corresponds to a hit, the electrically operated combination control means 160 outputs a control signal to the normally operated combination solenoid 523 to set the normally operated combination 522 for a predetermined open time. 2 Open the start port 52). Here, as described above, in the low base state where the electric chow support function (open extension function) is not activated, the electrically driven item control means 160 performs the ordinary electric jack 522 for 1 second × 3 times (total open time) In the high base state where the electric chew support function (open extension function) is activated while the motor is opened for 3 seconds), the normal motorized component 522 is 5.9 seconds × 1 time (total opening time 5.9) Seconds) open it. Here, with the operation termination condition of the normal motorized product 522, a predetermined number ("10" in the present embodiment) of game balls entered the second start opening 52, or the second start opening 52 The total opening time has reached the opening limit time ("3 seconds", "5.9 seconds" in this embodiment).

  When the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the gaming state control means 165 refers to the above-mentioned gaming state setting table, the kind of the symbol concerning the big hit, and the big hit winning time The game state after the end of the big hit game is determined based on the game state of and the game state after the end of the big hit game is switched. In the present embodiment, as described above, as a plurality of types of gaming state, normal gaming state (low probability low base state), time saving gaming state (low probability low base state), latent probability change gaming state (high probability low base state) The probability variation gaming state (high probability high base state) is set, and one of a plurality of effect modes is alternatively set with reference to the above-described gaming state setting table. In addition, since the gaming state setting table has already been described, the duplicated explanation is omitted here. Also, as described above, the occurrence of the big hit may be a transition trigger of the gaming state (although the transition control of the gaming state may be executed due to the big hit win), the occurrence of the small hit is not a transition trigger of the gaming state (The transition control of the gaming state caused by the small hit winning is not performed).

  When the special game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed, the game state control means 165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the end of the special game based on the big hit or small hit symbol type, Change the variation pattern selection state after the end of the special game. In this embodiment, the normal selection state, the limited frequency selection state, the short time selection state, and the probability variation selection state are set as the plurality of types of variation pattern selection states, and the plurality of types of variation are selected according to the determined gaming state. One of the pattern selection states is set alternatively. In addition, since the fluctuation pattern selection state has already been described, the redundant description is omitted here.

  The gaming state control means 165 generates a production control command (referred to as a “gaming state designation command”) including the current gaming state information and the variation pattern selection state information, and puts this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store.

  The error monitoring control means 170 monitors input information of the I / O port circuit 104, and inspects a magnetic detection signal by a magnetic sensor, a disconnection short circuit power source abnormality signal, a radio wave detection signal by a radio wave sensor, a door / frame open signal, etc. , It is determined whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, in order to indicate an error state effect on the effect control board 200, an effect control command ("error effect designating command") including the error information is requested. Although the description is omitted in FIG. 4 etc., the door opening switch is a means for detecting whether or not the glass frame 5 is opened, and the frame opening switch is detected whether or not the front frame 2 is opened. The back set open switch is a means for detecting whether or not the back setting board 30 is open. Further, the magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are so-called detection means for detecting so-called illegal gaming.

  The main information storage unit 180 is random number value information acquired in the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, the operation holding ball information of the special symbol and the normal symbol, and the gaming state related to the special symbol game and the ordinary symbol game Information on entering the ball easy state, information on the variation pattern selection state, result information of the winning lottery (big hit, small hit, off) information on stop symbols and variation patterns pertaining to special symbols and normal symbols, information on special games (round Number, opening time, opening mode (number of opening per round game, etc.), status information indicating the operating status of the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, status information indicating the operating status of the special electric symbol 542, effect control command It is configured to temporarily store data information and the like, and has a predetermined storage area for storing each information.

  The command transmission / reception means 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the effect control board 200 by parallel transmission when there is a command transmission request. It is done. Each effect control command has a 2-byte structure including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. In order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit 7 of MODE data is "1", Bit7 of EVENT data is "0". When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output at each transmission timing of MODE and EVENT. The effect control command generated in each process is, in principle, transmitted as one command for each interrupt cycle in the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The effect control board 200 is, as shown in FIG. 4, the effect lottery random number generation means 210, the effect integration means 220, the lamp control means 230, the feature control means 240, the error effect control means 250, the sub main information storage means 260, the command Transmission / reception means 270. The above-described means in the effect control board 200 are constituted by the sub main CPU 201, the ROM 202, the RAM 203, the hardware such as the electronic circuit disposed on the effect control board 200, and the software such as the control program stored in the ROM 202. Is a functional expression of

  The effect lottery random number generation means 210 is provided with a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the sub main CPU 201. These random number counters play a role as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. As this software random number, the pre-reading lottery random number which is used for the pre-reading effect lottery, the decorative symbol random number which is used for the drawing of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the fluctuation effect pattern random number which is used for the lottery of the fluctuation effect pattern of the decorative symbol The preview lottery random number used for the lottery, the jackpot effect pattern random number used for the lottery of the jackpot effect pattern, the stage lottery random number used for the transition lottery of the effect stage, and the like are included. These random numbers are updated using the remaining time when command analysis is not performed in the effect control side main processing described later (when the effect control command is not received from the main control board 100). Do.

  The effect supervising means 220 includes the effect mode control means 221, the hold information display control means 222, the advance notice control means 223, the variation effect control means 224, the decoration symbol control means 225, the notice effect control means 226, and the special game effect control means 227. Including.

  The effect mode control means 221 is based on the game state designation command from the main control board 100 to achieve consistency with the gaming state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side. Control mode). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, a normal mode, a time reduction mode, a latent mode, and a probability change mode are set as a plurality of types of effect modes, and the gaming state (or Depending on the variation pattern selection state or the like, any one of a plurality of types of effect modes is set alternatively, and variation effects according to the set effect mode are executed.

  Basically, the "normal mode" is set when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the "time saving mode" is set when the gaming state is the short time gaming state, and the gaming state is the latent probability change gaming state When the "probability mode" is set, the "probability mode" is set when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. However, when transitioning to the normal state based on the termination of the non-normal gaming state (time saving gaming state, latent probability changing gaming state, definite changing gaming state), the variation of the limited period immediately after the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state In the display, the special effect mode is set, and the normal effect mode is set when the variable display of the limited period is finished. The limited number of times is "four times" as the number of times of variation display of the special symbol. This means that the variable display count of the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "four times". That is, reaching the above-mentioned limited period means that the total number of the number of times of variation display of the 1st special symbol and the number of times of variation display of the 2nd special symbol has reached "4 times". In addition, as a modification, it is possible that only the number of variable display of the first special symbol reaches the upper limit number (4 times), or only the number of variable display of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit number (4 times) As an opportunity, the special mode may be ended (the mode may be shifted to the normal mode). Then, when one of the rendering modes is set, a background image dedicated to the rendering mode (display of the back of the decorative symbol is displayed on the screen as a rendering (a variation rendering) indicating that the user is staying in the rendering mode. A background image is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. As described above, since the background image and the BGM are set to be different for each effect mode, the player can recognize which effect mode is currently staying from the type of the background image or BGM. ing.

  The holding information display control means 222 is a first holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol, and a second number holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol. Have. Upon receiving the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, the suspension information display control means 222 updates (adds) the value of the corresponding counter based on the information on the number of operation suspension balls included in this command. On the other hand, when the hold information display control means 222 receives a change start command from the main control board 100, that is, when the operation hold ball is digested, it updates (subtracts) the value of the corresponding counter. Further, the holding information display control means 222 causes the holding image display unit 710 of the effect display device 70 to hold the number of operation holding balls for the first special symbol based on the values of the first holding ball number counter and the second holding ball number counter. It controls to display the number of holding images corresponding to the number of holding images corresponding to the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol. Further, the holding information display control means 222 switches to the holding image corresponding to the operation holding ball by the operation holding ball (the first operation holding ball) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being digested. Control is performed to display the displayed image during fluctuation. In this embodiment, unless explicitly mentioned, the reserved image of the first special symbol and the reserved image of the second special symbol are simply referred to as "reserved image" without distinction between the reserved image of the first special symbol and the fluctuating image of the first special symbol. The second special symbol may be simply referred to as a "image in motion" without being distinguished from the image in motion.

  The prefetch notice control unit 223 executes a prefetch determination (referred to as “prefetch lottery”) on the operation reserving ball which is the target of the prefetch notice effect. The preview advance notice effect is a so-called continuous notice effect that gives notice of the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit or high expectation effect (for example, reach effect) over one or more variable displays before the action-retention ball to be read ahead is digested. It is generated as one aspect of At this time, the pre-reading lottery is performed based on the information of the prior determination result included in the prior determination command from the main control board 100. Here, when the advance notice control means 223 receives the predetermination command from the main control board 100, it distinguishes the information of the predetermination result of the first special symbol and the information of the predetermination result of the second special symbol, respectively. The pre-read information storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 is temporarily stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (4) in a form combined with the entering order of the operation holding balls. This prefetch information storage area has the same configuration as the pending storage area of the main control board 100, and in the order of entry into the starting ports 51 and 52, the pending 1 storage area (first pending storage area), A reserve 2 storage area (second reserve storage area), a reserve 3 storage area (third reserve storage area), and a reserve 4 storage area (fourth reserve storage area) are provided. Each of the pending storage areas can store information on the result of the preliminary determination of the success or failure, information on the result of the preliminary determination of the symbol, and information on the result of the preliminary determination of the variation pattern as one set. Information on the predetermination result is stored in order of pending 1 storage area, pending 2 storage area, pending 3 storage area, pending 4 storage area, while pending 1 storage area, pending 2 storage area, pending 3 storage area, pending 4 It is digested in order of storage area (first in first out principle). In addition, when the information of the prior determination result of the pending 1 storage area is digested, the information of the prior determination result stored in the pending 2 storage area, the pending 3 storage area, and the pending 4 storage area is respectively stored in the lower number storage area. Shift and clear the contents of the pending 4 storage area to zero.

  Although not shown, a pending image display area for displaying the pending image and a during-moving image display area for displaying the during-moving image are allocated to the pending image display unit 710 of the effect display device 70. . While the pending image display area displays the corresponding pending image when the actuation symbol of the special symbol is generated, the corresponding pending image is lost when the actuation symbol of the special symbol is digested (during variation) Switch to the image). The hold images are displayed in order according to the generation order (in-ball order) of the action hold balls of the special symbol, and a maximum of four hold images corresponding to the action hold balls of the first special symbol, the action hold of the second special symbol A maximum of four reserved images corresponding to the sphere can be displayed. In addition, when the first reserved image displayed in the reserved image display area is digested, the reserved image moves to the fluctuating image display area and is displayed as a fluctuating image corresponding to the fluctuating display (the fluctuation Displayed from the start of the display to the stop). Specifically, each time a special symbol operation hold ball is generated, one hold image (hold image of hold 1, hold 2, hold 3 ... hold image) is additionally displayed, and the special symbol operation hold ball is also displayed. Every time the image is digested, the image during fluctuation displayed in the image display area during fluctuation disappears, and the hold images (hold images for hold 1, hold 2, hold 3, ...) displayed in the hold image display area Each one moves toward the image display area during fluctuation, and the first reserved image is switched to the image during fluctuation and displayed in the image display area during fluctuation. Here, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol is the main player in the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol is the main player in the short time gaming state, the latent probability variation gaming state and the positive variation gaming state. The hold display does not necessarily display up to eight hold images of the first special symbol and the second special symbol up to a maximum of four hold images of a special symbol that is the main player of the game in each gaming state. It may be displayed. However, as a modification thereof, in addition to the reserve image, a display showing the number of action reserve balls (for example, a number indication such as “0” or “4” and the action reserve balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) Unlike the hold image, the number display may be always displayed regardless of the game state.

  The variation production control means 224 is based on information (variation pattern information, variation addition information, etc.) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100, the variation process from variation start to stop in the variation display of the decorative symbol (render process ) Is determined by lottery. The variation production control means 224 holds a plurality of types of variation production pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation production pattern, and a variation pattern of a special symbol (a variation time out of the plurality of types of variation presentation pattern tables The variation effect pattern table corresponding to is selected. Here, while the main variation pattern (for example, "SP reach A" or "SP reach B", etc.) of the special symbol is determined on the main control substrate 100 side, the effect control substrate 200 side is based on the main variation pattern. A sub variation pattern of a decorative symbol (for example, "SP reach A1, A2 ..." or "SP reach A2, A3 ..." or the like) that defines the scenario of the effect display process in detail is determined. The variation display pattern of the decorative symbol defines the variation display mode of the decorative symbol, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the end of the variation, and notices at each stage in the display process The timing at which the effect is generated is also defined as a time schedule. Moreover, about the variation production pattern of this decoration symbol, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same (even when the variation start command of the same information is received), if the presentation mode during stay is different, the effects are mutually displayed. Variation presentation patterns with different contents can be selected. That is, the variation presentation pattern table is prepared for each presentation mode during stay (in the illustrated example, for convenience, only a common variation presentation pattern table independent of the presentation mode is provided).

  The decorative symbol control means 225 is a decoration based on the information (stop symbol information, gaming state information) included in the change start command from the main control board 100 and the above-mentioned change effect pattern determined by the change effect control means 224. The final stop symbol combination (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) is determined by lottery. Although the details will be described later, in this example, three symbol rows including a plurality of kinds of decorative symbols are configured, and the decorative symbols are formed by identification elements such as numbers. As described above, in the decorative symbol display section 700 on the screen, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. At this time, when the variable display of the first special symbol stays in the normal gaming state where the main game is to be played, the decorative symbol corresponding mainly to the first special symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display portion 700 (first special symbol The decorative symbol is variably displayed in conjunction with the fluctuating display of 2), and the variable display of the second special symbol stays in the non-normal gaming state (time saving gaming state, latent probability changing gaming state, probability changing gaming state) In the case, the decorative symbol mainly corresponding to the second special symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display unit 700 (the decorative symbol is variably displayed in a form interlocked with the variation display of the second special symbol). In addition, as a modification thereof, a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (referred to as "first decorative symbol") and a decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (referred to as "second decorative symbol") Is displayed in parallel on the screen, and the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second ornamental symbol is varied in the shape interlocked with the variable display of the second special symbol The configuration displayed may be adopted. In that case, a first decorative symbol display unit for fluctuating display of the first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol display unit for fluctuating display of the second decorative symbol are allocated on the screen. At this time, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be variably displayed in substantially the same size, or, among the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the decorative symbol of the main player of the game is relatively displayed. In addition to the variable display in a large size, it is possible not to change and display the decorative pattern of the person who is not the main player of the game in a relatively small size or the decorative display.

  In addition, the decorative symbol control means 225 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables to be referred to when the combination of stop symbols of the decorative symbol (also referred to as “stop symbol pattern”) is determined by lottery. As the plurality of types of tables, there are a stop symbol pattern table for big hit, a stop symbol pattern table for small hit, a stop symbol pattern table for reach loose, a stop symbol pattern table for non reach loose, and the like. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols, "stop symbol (big hit symbol) showing big hit", "stop symbol (small hit symbol) showing small hit" and "stop symbol showing off" (Disengagement pattern) "is included. A big hit symbol indicating a specific big hit (probable variation big hit) is a combination of stop modes in which three identical odd-numbered symbols are aligned (for example, “7 · 7 · 7”). A big hit symbol indicating a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit) is a combination of stop modes in which three identical even-numbered symbols are aligned (e.g., "2.2.2"). The off symbols are a combination of stop modes (for example, “1 · 3 · 8”) in which at least one of the three symbols is a symbol of a number different from other numbers. Here, out of reach symbols out of reach reach symbols are combinations of stop modes in which only the middle symbol is shifted several frames forward and back (for example, "3 · 1 · 3") with left symbol and right symbol matched. Become. In the case of a small hit symbol or a 2R big hit symbol even if it is a big hit symbol, for example, it may be a combination of predetermined stop modes such as “3 · 5 · 7”. In addition, when the lottery result is non-reach out of the specified, the so-called "chance" (for example, "1 · 2 · 3" or "5 · 6 · 7" as the order, etc. As deviations, “2 · 2 · 3” or “5 · 5 · 6” may be selected. Furthermore, in the case of performing an effect of performing temporary stop display before final display of the final stop symbol by pseudo continuous effect (so-called pseudo link) or the like, the temporary stop symbol is selected. When displaying a chance eye or temporary stop design, replace at least one stop design among the three designs with a special decoration design that displays characters such as "CHANCE" and "NEXT" for the decoration design of the number There are cases (for example, “1 · CHANCE · 3”, “2 · NEXT · 3”, etc.). In addition, the stop order for stopping a decorative symbol is previously determined for every fluctuation production pattern of the following statement, and it is made to stop in order of left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol in this embodiment in principle. However, if the variation time is a shortened variation variation production pattern in which the variation time is set to be extremely short, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped almost simultaneously, and if it is a special variation presentation pattern, the right symbol → It is also possible to stop in the order of the middle symbol → the left symbol, in which case the big hit expectation tends to be relatively high. In addition, it is desirable that the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol start to change at the same time at the start of the change, regardless of the stopping order. However, as a special variation effect pattern, the variation may be started in the order of the left symbol, right symbol and middle symbol.

  The notice effect control means 226 draws a notice effect pattern defining the contents of the notice effect to be executed at each stage of the change process of the decorative symbol along the scenario of the change effect pattern determined by the change effect control means 224. Determined by The preview effect pattern includes an effect pattern for displaying an image of a specific character, an animation, etc. temporarily or stepwise, an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound, an effect pattern for operating a movable character, and the like. The advance presentation effect is executed in parallel with the variation display of the decorative symbol, and it is indicated in advance that it is highly probable that the symbol variation stops in the big hit mode and the big hit reliability is high. The notice effects include a notice effect performed before a reach state occurs (including when a reach occurs) in the process of changing and displaying a decorative symbol, and a notice effect performed after a reach state occurs. The notice effects are different from each other in the big hit reliability, and basically, the notice effect displayed after reach occurrence is relatively big hit expectation degree than the notice effect displayed before reach occurrence It's getting higher. The notice effect control means 226 holds a notice lottery table to be referred to when selecting the notice effect pattern by type of notice effect, and notice according to the kind of notice effect occurring along the scenario of the change effect pattern. The lottery table is to be selected. As specific types of preview effects, for example, comment preview effects, background preview effects, SU (step-up) preview effects, logo preview effects, mini character preview effects, group preview effects, and feature preview effects are prepared. ing. This advance notice effect is basically performed by combining the display of one or more advance notice effects with the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 70. Therefore, even if the variation display of the decorative symbol by the same variation representation pattern, it becomes possible to generate a variety of representation modes by the combination with one or a plurality of advance presentation.

  The special game effect control means 227 is the contents (big hit effect pattern) of the big hit medium effect to inform that it is in the big hit game and the contents (small hit effect pattern for the small hit middle effect to inform that it is in the small hit game And determine. A big hit medium effect or a small hit medium effect is a start demonstration effect informing the start of a big hit game or a small hit game, a round effect informing that it is in a round game, and a notification of the end of a big hit game or a small hit game Including the end demonstration effect. When the special game effect control means 227 receives a big hit start demo command or a small hit start demo command from the main control board 100, it is based on the information of the big hit type stored in the sub main information storage means 260, etc. Alternatively, a small hit medium effect pattern (start demonstration effect pattern, round effect pattern, end demonstration effect pattern) is determined. A start demonstration effect time, a round effect time (effect time according to the opening pattern of the big winning opening 54), and an end demonstration effect time are set in the big hit effect pattern or the small hit medium effect pattern, and A series of presentation contents are set along the time axis. In addition, the special game effect control means 227 executes the start demonstration effect triggered by the reception of the big hit start demonstration command or the small hit start demonstration command from the main control board 100 according to the big hit production pattern or the small hit production pattern. Each round effect is executed in response to the reception of the effect designation command, and the end demonstration effect is executed in response to the big hit end demonstration command or the small hit end demonstration command being received. In the big hit start demonstration effect, for example, the characters "big hit start" are displayed on the screen to tell the start of the big hit game. Further, in the round effect, for example, the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of winning prize balls are displayed on the screen, and various images (animation images and the like) for enhancing a big hit game are displayed. Then, in the big hit end demonstration effect, for example, the characters "big hit end" are displayed on the screen, and the end of the big hit game is told. In addition, the small hit medium effect may be configured with the same effect contents as the above large hit medium effect, the stop symbol (small hit pattern) of the decorative symbol that triggered the small hit is determined and displayed It may be an effect that maintains the state of In this embodiment, the small hit medium effect is not an effect that clearly indicates that a big hit game is currently being executed, such as a big hit medium effect (in small hit, it is currently running a small hit game (Not the effect of clearly notifying that it is), continuously perform the effect (variation effect) before the start of the small hit game, and continuously perform the effect during the small hit game and after the small hit game is over Then, it may be shown so as not to know that a small hit game is being played (as if it were a display of variable fluctuation). However, in this configuration, it is premised that the jackpot effect is an effect different from that before or after the jackpot game (an effect different from the fluctuation effect).

  As described above, the effect supervising means 220 generates an image control command regarding an image and sound based on the determined effect contents (pre-reading effect pattern, fluctuation effect pattern, advance effect pattern, stop symbol pattern, big hit effect pattern, etc.). This is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260.

  The lamp control means 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamp, the light emission color and the like in accordance with the contents of the effect set by the effect generalizing means 220. The lamp control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for lighting control of the effect lamp LP (frame lamp 10, board lamp 80), and lamp data according to the determined effect pattern And transmits the lamp control signal (lamp data) to the lamp connection board 91.

  The role control means 240 controls the drive of each movable role 24 in accordance with the contents of the effect set by the effect supervising means 220. The character control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the movable character 24, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) according to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. .

  The error presentation control means 250 is configured to determine an error presentation pattern when an error presentation designation command is received from the main control board 100, and to notify an occurrence of an error condition in the gaming machine according to the error presentation pattern There is.

  The sub main information storage unit 260 is configured to temporarily store information of a decorative symbol, information of a variation effect pattern, information of a notice effect pattern, information of a control command, and the like, and is a predetermined for storing each information. It has a storage area. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing effect control commands from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing image control commands to the image control board 300, an image control board 300. And an ACK command buffer for storing an ACK command from Each command buffer is formed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, an image control command, and an ACK command.

  The command transmission / reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store this effect control command in the effect control command buffer of the sub main information storage means 260. The command transmission / reception means 270 generates an interrupt based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal from the main control board 100 to execute reception interrupt processing (described in detail later) of the rendering control command, and various rendering control commands are executed in this interrupt processing. It is supposed to get. When the command transmitting / receiving unit 270 receives a strobe signal, it performs the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command with priority over other interrupt processing (interrupt processing below priority level 7 described later). ing.

  Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 is stored in the sub main information storage means 260 in order to instruct execution of the effect contents (the change effect pattern information, the notice effect pattern information, the decoration symbol information, etc.) set by the effect generalization means 220. The image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 by serial communication. In principle, the image control command is transmitted every predetermined period (500 μs in this example) in the order set in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260. Thus, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 70 to variably display the effect image including the decorative symbol along the scenario of the change effect pattern. The notice effect is displayed in the form of being superimposed on the effect of the symbol change at each stage of the change display process. Furthermore, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives an ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300, and stores this ACK command in the ACK command buffer of the sub main information storage means 260.

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow of this embodiment will be described. As described above, FIG. 8 is a transition diagram of the gaming state and the effect mode in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, a normal gaming state, a time saving gaming state, a latent probability variation gaming state, and a probability variation gaming state are set as a plurality of types of gaming states. Then, the normal mode and the special mode are set as the effect mode corresponding to the normal gaming state, the time-short mode is set as the effect mode corresponding to the short-time gaming state, and the latent mode is set as the staging mode corresponding to the latent probability change gaming state The probability change mode is set as the effect mode corresponding to the probability change gaming state. The normal mode and the special mode corresponding to the normal gaming state may have the same mode as the mode (background image, stage) of the effect mode. That is, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern table) is not made different for the purpose of differentiating the effect mode between within the limited period and outside the limited period, but within the limited period. Since the purpose is to digest the action-reserved ball (remaining-hold) of the second special symbol at high speed, there is no need to differentiate the staging mode (rendering mode) within the limited period and outside the limited period. It is desirable to digest the operation-retention ball (remaining suspension) of the second special symbol in the effect mode (representation mode) of.

<Normal gaming state>
First, in the pachinko gaming machine PM when the power is turned on, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), and the game is started from this normal gaming state. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, since the ball entering frequency of the game ball to the first starting port 51 is set higher than the ball entering frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 52, the left strike The game ball is made to enter the first starting opening 51 by aiming at the left area PA1 and firing the game ball, and the first special symbol's pass / fail judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed mainly It will be fun to play. When staying in the normal gaming state, the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode or the special mode. In this normal gaming state, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, as a big hit type, "10R specific big hit" is 10%, "4R specific big hit 1" is 20%, "4R specific big hit 2 "35%" and "4R normal big hit" occur with a 35% probability of winning. When the jackpot type is "10R specified big hit 1" or "4R specified big hit 1", it shifts to the latent probability change gaming state after the end of the big hit game. Also, when the big hit type is "4R specific big hit 2", after the end of the big hit game, transition to the probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, when the big hit type is "4R normal big hit", it shifts to the time saving game state after the end of the big hit game.

<Time saving game state>
When the gaming state shifts to the short-time gaming state (low probability high base state), the electric chew support function is activated to increase the ease of entering the game ball into the second starting opening 52, so right-handed (right area Play the game ball by aiming at PA2 and make the game ball enter the second starting opening 52 by the game ball), and the game characteristic that executes the pass / fail judgment of the second special symbol (the fluctuation display of the second special symbol) It becomes. At this time, the short game state has a low probability that the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol judgment is the same as the normal game state, but it is a high base state where the electric Chu support function is activated and the game is held down Can proceed. At this time, when staying in the short game state, the effect mode is controlled to the short time mode. At this time in the short game state, if the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to a big hit, as the big hit type, "10R specific big hit" is 30%, "6R specific big hit" is 10%, "4R specific big hit 1" 10%, "4R specific big hit 2" 15%, "2R normal big hit" occurs with a 35% probability of winning. If the jackpot type is "10R specified big hit 1", "6R specified big hit" or "4R specified big hit 1", it shifts to the latent probability change gaming state after the end of the big hit game. Also, if the big hit type is "4R specific big hit 1", after the end of the big hit game, transition to the probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, if the big hit type is "2R normal big hit", after the big hit game is over, it shifts to the time saving game state again. In addition, at this time, the short game state is counted after the end of the big hit game and continues until the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 70 times. Therefore, when the variation display count of the special symbol reaches 70 times without occurrence of the next big hit in the short time gaming state, the short time gaming state ends at this time and falls to the normal gaming state.

<Latent Probability Game State>
When the gaming state shifts to the latent probability changing gaming state (high probability low base state), the electric chow support function does not operate, so it is recommended to hit the left for aiming at the first starting opening 51 originally, In the present embodiment, the ball entering frequency of the second starting port 52 is set relatively high even in this low base state, and a small hit game is triggered by the ball entering the second starting port 52. The characteristic game of frequent occurrence (small hit RUSH: details will be described later) is performed, so that the game ball is hit to the right by the left hit, rather than entering the game ball into the first start hole 51 It is better for the player to enter the ball, and as a result, it becomes a game characteristic in which the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed mainly. When staying in the latent probability variation gaming state, the effect mode is controlled to the latent probability mode. In this latent probability change gaming state, if the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to a big hit, as the big hit type, "10R specified big hit" is 30%, "6R specified big hit" is 10%, "4R specified big hit 1 10%, “4R specific big hit 2” is 15%, and “2R normal big hit” is 35% in probability of winning. If the jackpot type is "10R specified big hit 1", "6R specified big hit" or "4R specified big hit 1", it shifts to the latent probability change gaming state after the end of the big hit game. Also, if the big hit type is "4R specific big hit 1", after the end of the big hit game, transition to the probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, when the big hit type is "2R normal big hit", it shifts to the time saving game state after the end of the big hit game. In addition, this latent probability variation gaming state is counted after the end of the big hit game, and continues until the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times. Therefore, when the next big hit does not occur in the latent probability change gaming state and the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the latent probability change gaming state ends and falls to the normal gaming state. Here, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, the small hitting frequently appears in the judgment of the second special symbol and the gaming ball can easily enter the big winning opening 54 during the small hitting game. , It will be a game characteristic that aims to increase the number of balls out by small hit game. That is, when staying in this latent probability change gaming state, the game ball is made to enter the second starting opening 52 and the variable display of the second special symbol is frequently performed until the next big hit is generated. It is possible to make small hit games run frequently. The game characteristics of the latent probability change gaming state (small hit RUSH mode described later) will be described later.

<Probability game state>
When the gaming state shifts to the probability variation gaming state (high probability high base state), the electric chew support function is activated to increase the ease of entering the gaming ball into the second starting opening 52, so that the right hitting (right area Play the game ball by aiming at PA2 and make the game ball enter the second starting opening 52 by the game ball), and the game characteristic that executes the pass / fail judgment of the second special symbol (the fluctuation display of the second special symbol) It becomes. In this probability variation gaming state, since the second starting port 52 is in an easy-to-place ball entry state and the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol judgment is high probability, it is easy to generate a big hit of the second special symbol early. can do. When staying in this probability change gaming state, the effect mode is controlled to the probability change mode. In this probability variation gaming state, if the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol falls under the jackpot, as the jackpot type, "10R specified big hit" is 30%, "6R specified big hit" is 10%, "4R specified big hit 1" 10%, "4R specific big hit 2" 15%, "2R normal big hit" occurs with a 35% probability of winning. If the jackpot type is "10R specified big hit 1", "6R specified big hit" or "4R specified big hit 1", it shifts to the latent probability change gaming state after the end of the big hit game. Also, if the big hit type is "4R specific big hit 1", after the end of the big hit game, transition to the probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, when the big hit type is "2R normal big hit", it shifts to the time saving game state after the end of the big hit game. In addition, this probability variation gaming state is counted after the end of the big hit game, and continues until the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times. Therefore, when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times without occurrence of the next big hit in the probability variation gaming state, this probability variation gaming state ends and falls to the normal gaming status.

  Here, in the non-normal gaming state (time saving gaming state, latent probability changing gaming state, positive changing gaming state), the variation display number of the special symbol ends only the prescribed ST number (100 times) or a predetermined number of times (70 times), non normal When the gaming state falls to the normal gaming state, the special mode is set as the effect mode within the limited period (four rotations) immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state. Since this special mode is an effect mode that is set when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), the determination of whether the first special symbol is true or not (variation display of the first special symbol) ) Should be the main player of the game, but there is a very high possibility that the operation-retention ball (four) of the second special symbol generated during the execution of the non-normal game state is very likely, basically, It becomes the game characteristic which executes the pass / fail determination of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol) mainly. In addition, although it will be described in detail later, in this limited period, in order to efficiently digest the above-mentioned operation reserved ball (remaining suspension) of the second special symbol (the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely long In order to avoid), the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is set relatively high. Then, when the limited period of the special effect mode is ended (when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 4 times), the mode is shifted to the normal mode. When transitioning to this normal mode, basically, all of the operation-retaining balls of the second special symbol should have been digested within the limited period, so the judgment of the first special symbol (decision display of the first special symbol) Back to the playability to execute the

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one combination operation gate 91, 92 is disposed in each of the left area PA1 and the right area PA2 of the game board 20, and the special symbol is a big hit in any game state. Even when the stop display is made with the symbol, the big hit game is started when the game ball is made to enter the winning combination operation gates 91, 92 after the stop display of the big hit symbol. Therefore, even if the special symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol, the jackpot game is not started unless the gaming ball is allowed to pass through the winning operation gates 91 and 92.

[Playability of Latent Mode]
Next, the playability of the latent determination mode (latency probability changing gaming state) will be described. In the latent mode (latency state), small hits are frequently made out in the pass / fail determination of the second special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the second starting opening 52, and until the big hit is won, It is a game characteristic aiming to generate small hit games continuously and intensively. Hereinafter, the latent mode is also referred to as "small hit RUSH mode".

  When the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, when the gaming ball passes the operation gate 53, the hit is derived with a very high probability (1 / 1.02) in the determination of the normality of the symbol. In this latent probability change gaming state (low base state), when the normal symbol judgment is won, the normal electric jack 522 performs an opening operation for one second three times. Therefore, if aiming at the second start opening 52 and making a right strike, it is possible or easy to cause the game ball to enter the second start opening 52 while the ordinary electric jack 522 is in the open state. is there. Moreover, in this latent probability change gaming state, the winning probability of the small hit in the determination of success or failure of the second special symbol is set to a very high probability (about 1 / 1.1), and the third when winning in the small hit (2) Since the variation time of the special symbol is set to a very short time (0.5 seconds), there is a high possibility that a small hit will frequently occur based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 52.

  At this time, the second special symbol, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 52 and wins a small hit while the ordinary electric character 522 performs the opening operation for one second three times. The variable display of is finished in a very short time, and the small hit game will be started immediately. Here, the normal motorized component 522 performs a closing operation for 2 seconds immediately after the opening operation for 1 second (except for the opening operation for the third time). Therefore, after the small hit game is started, the gaming ball flowing down the right area PA2 is closed during the closing operation of the ordinary electric jack 522 while the ordinary electric jack 522 performs the closing operation for 2 seconds. It is easy to reach the special winning opening 54 by passing the upper surface of the member 524). Therefore, during the execution of the small hit game, the gaming ball flowing down the right side area PA2 passes the upper surface of the movable member 524 without entering the ordinary electric actor 522, and is a large winning combination disposed diagonally below By flowing down toward the mouth 54, the player can enter the big winning opening 54. Therefore, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, the game ball is made to enter the second starting opening 52 and the variable display of the second special symbol is frequently performed until the next big hit occurs, It becomes the game characteristic which makes the small hit game run with high frequency. Thus, each time a small hit game is executed, the player places about 2 to 3 gaming balls in the big winning opening 54 and continuously obtains about 20 to 30 winning balls each time. It becomes possible to advance the game while increasing the number of balls.

  On the other hand, even when the gaming state is a short time gaming state or a probability variation gaming state, the probability of winning a small hit is extremely high and the variation time of the small hit is set extremely short in the judgment of success of the second special symbol. Small hit games are likely to occur frequently. However, the following measures have been taken to limit the small hit RUSH's playability to the latent probability change gaming state only, and to suppress the increase in balls due to the small hit play for gaming states other than the latent probability change gaming state: It is done.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is a short time gaming state or a probability variation gaming state, when the gaming ball passes the operation gate 53, the hit is derived with a very high probability (1 / 1.01) in the normality judgment of the normal symbol Ru. In this gaming state (high base state), when the normal symbol determination result is won, the normal electric actor 522 performs one opening operation for 5.9 seconds. Therefore, it is extremely easy to make the game ball enter the second starting opening 52 while the ordinary electric jack 522 is in the open state, if the player strikes the second starting opening 52 and strikes the right. . In addition, even in the short game state or the odd change game state at this time, the winning probability of the small hit in the determination of the success or failure of the second special symbol is set to a very high probability (about 1 / 1.1) Because the fluctuation time of the second special symbol of the time is set to a very short time (0.5 seconds), a small hit may occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 52 high.

  Here, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 52 and wins a small hit while the ordinary electric character 522 performs the opening operation for 5.9 seconds, the second special symbol The variable display ends in a very short time, and the small hit game is immediately started. At this time, when the small hit game is executed while the normal motor operated item 522 continues the opening operation (while the second starting opening 52 is in the open state), the current flows through the right area PA2. The game ball is very easy to enter into the open ordinary electric actor 522 and the possibility of reaching the big winning opening 54 becomes extremely low. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed after the normal electric character 522 is closed (after the second start port 52 is closed), the subsequent game balls pass the operation gate 53. Then, since the time until the ordinary electric jack 522 operates to open is set to an extremely short time (variation time 0.2 seconds + stop time 0.1 second), this immediately open ordinary electric jack It is easy for the game ball to enter 522. That is, during the execution of the small hit game, the normal electric role 522 (the second start opening 52) is in a substantially open state, and the gaming ball flowing down the right area PA2 is an open state ordinary electric role It is extremely easy to enter the item 522 (second starting opening 52), and it is extremely difficult to enter the large winning opening 54 disposed downstream thereof. Therefore, when the gaming state is a short time gaming state or a probability variation gaming state (high base state), the gaming ball reaches the large winning opening 54 even if small hits frequently appear in the pass / fail determination of the second special symbol The possibility is extremely low, and it is extremely difficult to increase the payout by small hit games.

  In addition, even when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (except for the limited period), the winning probability of the small hit is set to the extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1) in the determination of the success or failure of the second special symbol However, since the variation time of the second special symbol is set to a very long time (10 minutes or more), the player entered a game ball into the second starting opening 52 and played a game aiming for a small hit Even so, the efficiency of digestion of the second special symbol is very bad, and small hit games can not be made frequently. In addition, when within the limited period of the normal gaming state, the limited frequency selection state is set as the variation pattern selection state, and the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is set relatively high (the second special symbol The fluctuation time will not be very long). As described above, within the limited period immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state, the limitation frequency selection state is provided as the variation pattern selection state, and the reason for increasing the variation efficiency of the second special symbol will be described later.

[About the entry rate of the latent mode]
Next, the rush rate of the latent determination mode (latency probability changing gaming state) will be described. As shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 7, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, when the big hit type is "10R specific big hit" or "4R specific big hit 1", the gaming state at the time of big hit elected Regardless of the condition, the latent probability change gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game. It should be noted that for other big hit types (4R specific big hit 2, 4R normal big hit), regardless of the playing state at the time of big hit, the latent probability change playing state is not set as the playing state after the end of the big hit game . At this time, for the jackpot type of the first special symbol, "10R specific big hit" occurs with a 10% winning probability, and "4R specific big hit 1" occurs with a 20% winning probability. Therefore, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, the rush rate (transition probability) to the latent probability change gaming state is always "30%" regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit.

  On the other hand, if the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit classification is "10R specific big hit", "6R specific big hit", "4R specific big hit", the gaming state at the time of big hit elected In the normal gaming state, the probability change gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game (the latent probability change gaming state is not set), and the gaming state at the time of the big hit is time saving gaming state, the latent probability change gaming state, In the case of the probability change gaming state, the latent probability change gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game. In other words, if you win the "10R specific big hit", "6R specific big hit", "4R specific big hit" as a specific big hit to which the special symbol probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time shortening function are given, the gaming state at the time of the big hit is If it is a normal gaming state, the electric chew support function is granted after the end of the big hit game, but if the gaming state at the time of the big hit is a short time gaming state, a latent probability variation gaming state, a positive variation gaming state, after the big hit gaming is over Den Chu support function is not provided. At this time, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, since the variable display of the first special symbol is the main player of the game, when the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit (so-called accident). It is possible to secure fair and fair gaming by suppressing transition to the latent probability variation gaming state (small hit RUSH mode) which is the most advantageous state for the player. In addition, when a specific big hit of the second special symbol occurs in the normal gaming state, the right hitting in the normal gaming state (or even in the normal gaming state can be entered or not by entering the probability variation gaming state instead of the latent probability variation gaming state) Improper act of forced entry from the normal gaming state to the latent probability change gaming state (small hit RUSH mode) by acquiring the specific big hit of the second special symbol by right hitting aiming at the second start opening 52 which is easy to enter the ball Can be prevented. It should be noted that for other big hit types (4R specific big hit 2, 2R normal big hit), regardless of the playing state at the time of big hit, the latent probability change playing state is not set as the playing state after the end of the big hit game . At this time, for the jackpot type of the second special symbol, "10R specific big hit" occurs with a 30% winning probability, "6R specific big hit" occurs with a 10% winning probability, "4R specific big hit 1" It occurs with a 10% chance of winning. Therefore, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit is the normal gaming state, the rush rate (transition probability) to the latent probability change gaming state will be "0%", If the gaming state at the time of the big hit is a short time gaming state, a latent probability variation gaming state, a probability variation gaming state, the rush rate (transition probability) to the latent probability variation gaming state is "50%".

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game have different transition conditions to the small hit RUSH mode (latency probability change gaming state), and until the small hit RUSH mode is reached. Since variations can be given to the manner of transition of the game state, it is possible to create an unprecedentedly complex and diverse gameplay.

[About the production of the latent mode]
Next, the main presentation contents in the latent mode (small hit RUSH mode) will be described. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the latent mode turning effect as the effect executed in the latent mode. When the effect mode is the latent probability mode, the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed on the screen of the effect display device 70. During the execution of this latent confirmation mode, in the variable display of the second special symbol, a latent confirmation mode turning effect is executed to ask whether the latent confirmation mode continues or the latent confirmation mode ends. It is possible. The latent mode turning effect includes a latent mode continuation effect for suggesting or notifying that the latent mode is continued, and a latent mode ending effect for suggesting or notifying that the latent mode is ended.

  During execution of the latent mode (hidden probability change gaming state), as described above, SP reach effect (battle effect in which the ally character competes with the enemy character) is executed as the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol It can be done. In the present embodiment, the SP reach effect (battle effect) is also configured to be used as the latent mode turning effect. That is, in the latent indication mode rotation effect, the latent indication mode may continue even after the variable display, or the latent indication mode may end in the variable display, the SP being executed during the variable display Suggestion or notification is based on the contents of the reach effect (rendering result). Note that "termination of the latent mode" includes that the latent mode (latency state) temporarily ends. In other words, when winning in the battle effect, a big hit game is started, so once a big hit game state (normal game state / low probability low base state) is set, but after the end of the big hit game, the game will go on again In order to enter the firm mode (latency probability variation gaming state) (except for the “4R specific big hit 2”), the above latent probability mode end suggestion effect is that the latency mode (latency probability variation gaming state) is “temporarily ended” It is also possible to suggest or inform

  As described above, the SP reach effect executed during the latent mode is configured as a battle effect in which the teammate character plays against the enemy character. When the ally character wins the enemy character in this battle effect, it is determined that the "specific big hit" is won in the variable display, and when the ally character loses the enemy character, the "normal big hit" is won in the variable display. Determine what you did. That is, when the battle effect results in a battle result of victory or defeat, it is determined that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display, and the latent mode is displayed with the big hit symbol stopped and displayed. It will end. Therefore, a winning effect or a losing effect in the battle effect of the variable display is configured as a latent mode end effect that suggests or informs that the latent mode is ended with the variable display. On the other hand, when the battle effect is a draw result, it is determined that the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display, and the latent probability mode is also displayed after the end of the variable display (the next and subsequent variable display). It will continue. Therefore, a latency probability that suggests or announces that the latent mode continues even after the end of the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display after the next time) that the allied character is tied to the enemy character in the battle effect of the fluctuation display. It is comprised as a mode continuation presentation.

  Here, in the case where the currently staying effect mode is the latent mode, as described above, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70, since the variation display is mainly performed. The fluctuation representation corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed mainly. On the other hand, when the effect mode currently staying is the latent probability mode, when the first special symbol fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation display) is executed by the result of the judgment of the first special symbol being a big hit At a predetermined timing during the fluctuation display of this first special symbol or during the stop display, the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly ended, and it corresponds to the fluctuation display of this first special symbol It changes to the fluctuation production. However, the variation display itself of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 72 is continuously performed only by forcibly terminating only the variation specialization of the second special symbol on the screen. The “predetermined timing” is preferably, for example, the timing at which the success / failure result is notified in the variable display or the timing immediately before that.

  At this time, if the result of the determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, until the end of the display of the first special symbol of the big hit variation of the second special symbol will not be a big hit is not derived jackpot In the no-lottery state of the second special symbol, only the "small hit" or "off" is derived as a result of the judgment of the second special symbol. Therefore, even during the execution of the first special symbol big hit variation display, even if the second special symbol variation display is executed, only the small hit variation display or the out-of-range variation display as the variation display of this second special symbol It will be. Therefore, since the big hit variation indication of the 2nd special symbol is not performed during execution of the big hit variation indication of the 1st special symbol, until the big hit variation display of this 1st special symbol ends, the 2nd Battle production (battle victory production, battle defeat production) that suggests or informs that the result of the success or failure judgment of the special symbol has become a big hit, that is, latency mode end production that suggests or informs that the latency mode is ended It will not appear.

  On the other hand, since the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation display of the first special symbol is set to a very long time (10 minutes), while the big hit fluctuation display of the first special symbol reaches the end ((first special symbol The second special symbol variation display (small hit variation display, out-of-out variation display) can be executed a plurality of times until switching to the variation effect corresponding to the variation display of. Until the big hit variation indication of the first special symbol reaches the end, only the small hit variation indication or the outlier variation indication of the second special symbol can be executed, the variation corresponding to the variation indication of this second special symbol As the effect, an effect (including a battle draw effect) may be executed to indicate or notify that the result of the pass / fail determination of the second special symbol has become a small hit or a loss. That is, until the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is finished, it is determined that the latent mode continues to be continued, and until it is switched to the variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, As a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, a battle draw effect that suggests or informs that the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol has been lost, that is, it indicates that the latent mode will continue It is designed that the latent mode continuation effect to be performed can be executed. In addition, while the big hit fluctuation display of the first special symbol reaches the end (while it is switched to the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol), in addition to the latent mode continuation effect, the second A small hit winning effect to be performed triggered by the special symbol being stopped and displayed by the small hit symbol can be executed. Note that this small hit winning effect may be included as a type of the latent mode continuous effect.

[About the fluctuation state of special mode]
Next, the fluctuation state of the special mode will be described. FIG. 18 is a schematic view for explaining the fluctuation state of the special mode. As described above, the latent probability variation gaming state continues until the sum of the variable display counts of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the prescribed ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs. Therefore, the latent probability variation gaming state ends without the occurrence of the next big hit as the sum of the number of times of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the prescribed ST number (100 times). Then, when this latent probability change gaming state ends, it falls to the normal gaming state. The normal gaming state is a low probability and low base state, and basically, it is a game characteristic in which the game ball is made to enter the first starting opening 51 and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed mainly. In this normal gaming state, as with the above-mentioned latent probability changing gaming state, although the power chew support function is not activated, the entry ease of the second starting opening 52 is secured to some extent, and it is realistic It is possible or easier for the game ball to enter the second starting opening 52 by performing a right strike.

  At this time, if the gaming state is the normal gaming state (if it falls from the latent probability change gaming state to the normal gaming state), fluctuation of the second special symbol to limit frequent occurrences of small hitting games in this normal gaming state By setting the time to a very long time, it is desirable to suppress the act of hitting the right in this normal gaming state (aim for entering the game ball into the second starting opening 52). When the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, as described above, since it is a game characteristic in which the game ball is made to enter the second starting opening 52 and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed mainly, the latency is At the end of the probability change gaming state (when transitioning to the normal gaming state), the possibility that the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol will remain is very high. Therefore, in the few rotations immediately after transitioning to the normal gaming state, the action-retention ball of the above-mentioned second special symbol is digested so that the variation display of the second special symbol is performed for a very long time. In particular, when the second special symbol's fluctuation display is a big hit fluctuation display, a special screen (still image) is continuously displayed for a long time, indicating or notifying a jackpot win during execution of the fluctuation display. As a result, a beginner or the like can not understand the current game situation (what is happening), which may cause many players to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, for the limited period immediately after transitioning from the advantageous gaming state (time saving gaming state, latent probability changing gaming state, probability changing gaming state) to the normal gaming state, the variation pattern selection state is set to the limited frequency selection state, and the second special By shortening the fluctuation time of the symbol, it is possible to digest the residual reserve of the second special symbol at high speed.

  First, also in this embodiment, in principle, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is extremely long for the same reason as before, outside the limited period (normal mode) It is set to (10 minutes or more) to suppress the act of right-handing when there is no darkness. Specifically, outside the limited period of the normal gaming state (normal mode), the fluctuation pattern selection state is set to the normal selection state, so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol changes the fluctuation pattern table 1 (FIG. 10). It will be selected by reference. In this normal selection state, the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol is extremely low because the extremely long fluctuation time is selected regardless of the result of the judgment of the second special symbol, so the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is extremely bad. It becomes a thing. Note that, as a modification, at least only the small hitting fluctuation display may be an extremely long fluctuation time.

  On the other hand, in the limited period (special mode) immediately after shifting to the normal gaming state, the fluctuation pattern selection state is set to the restriction frequency selection state, so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the fluctuation pattern table 2 ( It will be selected with reference to FIG. When the variation pattern selection state is the limited frequency selection state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened regardless of the result of the judgment of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern selection state is the normal selection state The average value of the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened compared to. In other words, in the fluctuation display within the limited period immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state (the fluctuation display within 4 rotations), the second variable display than the fluctuation display after this limited period (the fluctuation display after the fifth rotation) The fluctuation time of the special symbol (average value of fluctuation time) is shortened, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be high. Therefore, within the limited period immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state, it is possible to quickly digest the action-holding ball (remaining-hold) of the second special symbol (very long time variable display is executed as before) Even if the player falls from the latent probability change gaming state to the normal gaming state, the player can proceed with the game without discomfort because the speedy game is played within the limited period. As a modification of the present embodiment, in FIG. 18, the variation display of the first special symbol in the latent probability variation gaming state may be “short variation” as in the variation display of the second special symbol. Further, in FIG. 18, the main effect within the limited period of the normal gaming state may be a change effect corresponding to the change display of the first special symbol (a change effect corresponding to the change display of the second special symbol is not performed or The effect is displayed as a simple display mode by a reduction display etc. only when a big hit is generated, and other than that, the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed).

  In addition, about the variation pattern selection state, the limited frequency selection state within the limited period is the same as the normal selection state outside the limited period, the gaming state is the normal gaming state (a gaming state where the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is not operating) Since it is a fluctuation pattern selection state set corresponding to being, the latency set corresponding to the latent probability variation gaming state (the gaming state in which the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is activated) before the transition. The fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is relatively low compared to the preselected state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is in the order of “normal gaming state (normal mode)” <“normal gaming state (special mode)” <“latency probability changing gaming state (latency mode)”. It is configured to be high. In other words, in the order of "normal gaming state (normal mode)" <"normal gaming state (special mode)" <"latency probability changing gaming state (latency mode)", the average value of the variation time of the second special symbol is short Become. The same relationship is established in the advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability changing gaming state) other than the latent probability changing gaming state in the long and short relation of the average value of the fluctuation time. Therefore, in FIG. 18, the process of transitioning from the latent probability change gaming state to the normal gaming state is described, but instead, the process of transitioning from the time saving game state or the probability change gaming state to the normal game state is applied Also, the same relationship as described above is established, and similar operations and effects can be obtained. In addition, with the term "average value of fluctuation time (variation display time)" as the term used above, the fluctuation display time is measured every fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the average based on the actual measurement value It is not limited to the meaning of taking a value. More specifically, in the case where the variable display time is configured to be determined for each variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (for each change start), it should be determined (selected) In the case where there are a plurality of types of variation display time candidates, the expected value based on the plurality of types of variation display times (the sum of “selection probability × variation display time in each variation time” is given. If 10 seconds is 50%, 30 seconds is 30%, and 60 seconds is 20% with the reference to the variation pattern table), “10 seconds × 0.5 + 30 seconds × 0.3 + 60 seconds × “0.2 = 26 seconds” is the average value of the fluctuation display time), but when there are one kind of fluctuation display period candidate to be selected, the one kind of fluctuation display period itself is taken as the average value. (As an example, a certain fluctuation state (a certain fluctuation Over at down with reference to the table are states), if only 10 seconds there is no selection candidate, "10 seconds × 1.0 (100%) = 10 seconds" is the average value of the variation display time). As a method of realizing the “average value of the variable display time” to be different, the candidate of the variable display time and / or the selection probability are made different, or even if the candidate of the variable display time and / or the selection probability is the same There are various methods such as changing the period value when adding the variable display time, but it is not limited to any method.

[About the presentation mode of the special mode]
Next, the presentation mode of the special mode will be described. Here, when the success or failure judgment result of the second special symbol is a big hit (per so-called accident) within several revolutions immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state, the special screen (still image) that suggests or notifies this big hit is extremely It is desirable that the display be continued continuously for a long time, but by performing such display, a skilled player or the like recognizes the occurrence of a big hit, and until the long-term fluctuation display of the second special symbol is ended. In order to reduce the holding ball as much as possible during this period, the game ball may stop being fired, and the operation rate of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, within the limited period immediately after transitioning to the normal gaming state, as described above, the fluctuation pattern selection state is set to the restriction frequency selection state, and the average of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set. By shortening the value and displaying the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol on the screen of the effect display device 70, the special screen for an extremely long time is not displayed, and the player The game ball will continue to be launched without a sense of discomfort, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be prevented from decreasing.

[Commonization of the team operation gate]
In the conventional gaming machine, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol generated during the latent probability change gaming state is digested by being within several revolutions immediately after the latent probability variation gaming state is ended and shifted to the normal gaming state, Variation display of the second special symbol is easy to be performed. At this time, if the winning determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit (per so-called accident), if the combination operation gate is arranged only in the right area PA2 (near the big winning opening 54), the game If the player does not know the existence of the team operation gate or can not recognize the occurrence of this jackpot and is aiming at the first starting opening 54 to strike left, the waiting state of the jackpot game continues for a long time The jackpot game can not be started), and there is a possibility that the game can not be advanced smoothly.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1, while the normal gaming state is being executed, it is assumed that the first start hole 54 is aimed at the first start port 54 to play the game, and it is assumed that the first left area PA1 is placed If the starting opening 51 is doubled with the first combination operating gate 91 and the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 51, it simultaneously passes through the first combination operating gate 91 (the gaming ball is first If it is detected by the start opening switch 511, it is simultaneously detected by the first combination operation gate switch 911). In other words, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the player plays the game in which the game ball is made to enter the first starting port 51 by left striking, and therefore the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 51. If it is possible to cause the ball, as a result, the gaming ball is also passed to the first combination run gate 91. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the big hit (per so-called accident) is by being digested the operation reserve ball (remaining reserve) of the second special symbol that occurred in the latent probability change gaming state before the transition Even if it occurs, based on letting the game ball enter the first starting opening 51, the game ball is handled as having passed through the first combination operation gate 91, and the game is shifted to a big hit game without delay. It can be done. Therefore, if the player who was playing a game with the gaming machine PM has ended the game due to the fact that the gaming state has fallen to the normal state (when the gaming machine has been withdrawn), the player will sit next. When a player starts playing a game, the player must first aim at the first starting opening 51 to advance the game, so a big hit (so-called accident) occurs based on the above-mentioned operation reserved ball of the special symbol Even if the game ball is made to enter the first starting opening 51 as a result, the game ball is passed to the first combination operation gate 91, and the big hit game is started accordingly. Become. Then, the player performs the big hit without causing a sense of incongruity if the big hit notification effect of reporting the occurrence of the big hit at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening (the first combination operation gate 91). It can be recognized.

[External information signal]
Next, the external information signal output from the external information terminal board 600 will be described. In the present embodiment, the external information signal output from the external information terminal board 600 to the external device outside the machine as the external information includes a big hit signal, a connection signal, a symbol determination signal, and the like. The external information signal includes, for example, other signals such as a prize ball signal, a door frame open signal, a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection short circuit power source abnormality signal, an abnormality sensor detection (such as ball entry passage time abnormality) signal. However, since this is a known technique, the description will be omitted below.

  The external device installed outside the gaming machine PM includes a data display, a hall computer, and the like. The data indicator is a device which is installed above the gaming machine PM and displays data (gaming information) on the operation state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display unit is a useful judgment material for the player to select a game machine. The hall computer counts the operation states of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on the external information signal outputted from each gaming machine installed in the hall in the game arcade, and each gaming machine It is a device that manages the operating status of the machine. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM through a data display, or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without the data display.

  Here, as the terms used below, the terms "condition device" and "character continuous device" both mean conceptual devices (control devices). The condition device is a device that is a condition for operating the accessory continuous operation device. This condition device is a conceptual device mainly composed of the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) and activated upon the final display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol with a big hit symbol. The continuous product operating device is a device that operates with the activation of the condition device on models that do not have a combination operating gate, and on models that have a combination operating gate mounted, after the condition device has been activated, It is a device that operates with the game ball entering the combination operation gate as a trigger. The accessory continuous operation device is mainly configured by the main control board 100 (main CPU 101), and is a conceptual device for operating the special motorized component 542 continuously.

  FIG. 19 is a time chart of the big hit signal. The jackpot signal is an external information signal indicating that a jackpot is in progress. The jackpot signal is a condition of any of the special symbol display devices 71 and 72 in a state in which at least one of the special symbol probability fluctuation function and the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is operating (a gaming state other than the normal gaming state). When the special symbol (big hit symbol) that the device is to operate is displayed in a definite manner, from when the finalized display time of this special symbol (displayed time after confirmation) has elapsed, from when the operation of the condition device is finished, On output. In addition, "0.5 second" is set as above-mentioned as a fixed display time of a special symbol. The final display time of the special symbol is the time when the special symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is held). However, the second special symbol (big hit symbol) that the condition device operates in the second special symbol display device 72 when the probability variation function of the special symbol is inactive and when the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is not active If the condition device operates based on the finalized display, the jackpot signal will be output ON during the time the operation of the item continuous operation device starts until the operation of the condition device ends. . That is, when the result of the success or failure of the second special symbol is a big hit when the gaming state is normal gaming state (low probability low base state), the big hit signal is a second special symbol (big hit symbol) stop display The output is not turned on at the time when the determined display time has elapsed, but is output from the start of the operation of the bonus product continuous operation device. Here, in the present embodiment, after the condition device is activated, the bonus item continuous actuation device starts to operate under the condition that the gaming ball passes through the combination actuation gates 91 and 92, so the jackpot signal The start timing of the output depends on the timing at which the gaming ball passes through the combination operation gates 91 and 92. Thus, at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state, as a reason to output the big hit signal from the start of operation of the continuous game actuating device, as described above, the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state In the limited period after falling to this normal gaming state, when the player ends the game and the game machine PM is in the vacant seat state, the operation-retention ball of the second special symbol is dropped. If so-called accident jackpot occurs by digesting (remaining reserve generated during the advantageous gaming state), when the output of the jackpot signal is started from the time when the final display time of the second special symbol elapses, this gaming machine PM Of the game machine PM being hit in advance on the basis of the game information displayed on the data display of the game player, and only a specific player who accidentally knows it will gain the disadvantage. But It is from Jill.

  FIG. 20 is a time chart of a continuous signal. The continuous signal is an external information signal indicating that the continuous signal is being received. A signal during continuous use is in principle a special symbol display device 71 in a state in which at least one of the special symbol probability fluctuation function and the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is operating (a gaming state other than the normal gaming state). The special symbol (big hit symbol) that the condition device will operate is displayed on one of 72 and 72, and the operation of the condition device starts when at least the confirmation display time of this special symbol (display time after confirmation) has elapsed. The output is on until the end (the addition period will be described later). However, the second special symbol (big hit symbol) that the condition device operates in the second special symbol display device 72 when the probability variation function of the special symbol is inactive and when the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is not active When the condition device is activated, the continuous signal is output ON at least from the time when the operation of the item continuous operation device starts until the operation of the condition device is finished. The additional period will be described later). That is, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit when the gaming state is normal gaming state (low probability low base state), the second special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped in the continuous signal It is not output at the time of the elapse of the displayed fixed display time, but is output from the start of the operation of the bonus product continuous operation device. Here, in the present embodiment, after the condition device is activated, the bonus item continuous actuation device starts to operate under the condition that the gaming ball passes through the combination actuation gates 91 and 92. The output start timing of the medium signal depends on the timing at which the gaming ball passes through the combination operation gates 91 and 92. The reason why the continuous signal is output from the start of the operation of the continuous game operating device at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state like this is from the time of starting the operation of the continuous work operating device It is the same as the reason for outputting. Moreover, in addition to the above-mentioned on-output period (in continuous connection with the end time of operation of the condition device), the continuous-in-flight signal has a probability fluctuation function or a special symbol of a special symbol as the above-mentioned additional period. While the variation time reduction function is operating, that is, while the advantageous gaming state (time saving gaming state, latent probability changing gaming state, definite changing gaming state) continues, on output is performed.

  FIG. 21 is a time chart of the symbol determination signal. The symbol determination signal is an external information signal that is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, about 0.1 second) each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops changing. However, after the probability variation function of the special symbol or the variation time shortening function of the special symbol starts to operate, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops a total of 100 times (specified ST times) and is determined If the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped while the display time (stop display time) elapses, the symbol confirmation signal is not turned on when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped. . That is, when the gaming state is the advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variation gaming state, latent probability variation gaming state), the variable display of the second special symbol is the main player of the game, the variable display of the first special symbol In response to the stop, the symbol determination signal is not output on, and the symbol determination signal is output on when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped. On the other hand, after the probability variation function of the special symbol or the variation time shortening function of the special symbol starts to operate, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops a total of 100 times (specified ST times) and is determined If the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped except when the display time (stop display time) elapses, the symbol determination signal is turned on when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped. I will not. That is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, since the variable display of the first special symbol is the main player of the game, the symbol determination signal is output on upon the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol. The symbol determination signal is output ON when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped. That is, in the present embodiment, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of the special symbol of the main player of the game is stopped according to the gaming state currently staying. , The symbol determination signal is output on.

  In addition, when the variation display of the other special symbol is compulsorily stopped in response to the big hit fluctuation display of one of the special symbols being stopped among the first special symbol and the second special symbol as its modification. The symbol finalization signal may not be turned on when the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped. That is, in the above embodiment, as described above, when the gaming state is the advantageous gaming state (time reduction gaming state, probability variation gaming state, latent probability variation gaming state), the variable display of the second special symbol is the main player of the game When the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, the symbol determination signal is not output on, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the symbol determination signal is output on. For example, as the above-mentioned simultaneous variation processing (variation forced stop processing), the big hit variation indication of the first special symbol and the small hitting variation indication or the outlier variation indication of the second special symbol are performed at the same time In the state, when the big hit variation indication of the first special symbol is stopped earlier, at the same time when the small hitting variation indication of the second special symbol or the off variation indication is forced to stop, the first In response to the forced stop of the small hit variation display or the out variation display of the special symbol, the symbol confirmation signal is triggered when the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is stopped without outputting the symbol determination signal on. May be output. Also, as another modification, in the short game state (low probability high base state), the first starting port 51 is configured as a normal electric role (electric chow) when the electric chow support function is activated for the predetermined number of times of fluctuation display If the second special symbol's variable display is stopped, the symbol confirmation signal is not output on, and if the second start opening 52 is configured as a regular electric combination (electric power), the first It may be configured such that the symbol determination signal is not output on as triggered by the stop of the variation display of the special symbol.

<Process on main control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation process in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The process on the main control board 100 side is configured to include a main control side main process and a main control side timer interrupt process.

Main control side main process
22 to 23 are flowcharts showing the main control side main processing of the main control board 100. In the main control side main processing, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by the reset at the time of power on, the program is started and the processing after S1 is started.

  First, as the initial setting necessary at the time of power on, the start address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S1), and the access of the RAM 103 is permitted (S2). Subsequently, a vector table storing the start address of the program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in the built-in register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). When the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is zero cleared in S9 described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag is read, and it is judged whether the information of the power-off normal is stored (S6).

  Here, when the information on power-off normal is stored (S6: YES), a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether the checksum is 0, that is, whether the checksum is normal (S8). The checksum at power on calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated at power off processing described later, so if it is backed up normally, the check at power on is checked. Sam is "0". As described above, it is determined when the power is turned on whether the information stored in the RAM 103 before power-off is properly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12 described later in order to return to the state before the power failure. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, initialization data at power-on is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 70, initialize the effect lamp LP, and the like, a request for an effect control command (“effect initial command”) to the effect control board 200 is requested (S11).

  Next, in the power failure / return setting process, setting of power on normal information, initialization of various errors, and communication initialization with the payout control board 400 in the RAM 103 are sequentially performed (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to store that the power-on was correctly performed, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag and the information on the power-off occurrence is initialized. Turn off the power off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are set, and data for the number of transfer bytes is transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of the power-off is read, and the power-off recovery process relating to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

  Subsequently, a transmission request of the effect control command ("power-off recovery command") at the time of power-off recovery between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 is made (S15). The power failure recovery command includes information on the inspection of the communication line, the operating state of the special symbol, the number of probability variations, the number of time reductions, the number of easy entering states, the variation pattern selection status, and the error status. The command request for the unsent part before power-off is cleared. Next, in the symbol memory number command request process, read the information of the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is turned off, and request the effect control command including the information of the number of operation pending balls ( S16).

  Subsequently, return setting is performed to return the normal motor-operated part 522 to the state before the power-off (for example, the second start port 52 is in the open state) (S17). Further, return setting is performed to return the special motorized combination 542 to a state before the power is turned off (for example, the big winning opening 54 is in the open state) (S18). Subsequently, the value of the probability change flag is read, and the operation state of the probability variation function of the special symbol at the time of power-off is set (S19). The probability change flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game (flag indicating that the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is in operation). Next, in order to start the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as an initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and a timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt prohibition is set (S21). Then, clear word 1 ("55H") is set as preparation for restarting the watchdog timer (S22).

  Next, in order to determine the occurrence of the power failure, the value of the power failure confirmation flag is read, and it is determined whether or not the power failure has occurred (S23). When the power is not shut off, the initial value random number updating process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number updating process, in this initial value random number updating process, the initial value random number per symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value "0".

  Next, interrupt permission is set to permit generation of timer interrupt processing (S25), and the process returns to the processing for prohibiting the above-described interrupt (S21), and the loop processing of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed at predetermined intervals, but the remaining time from the completion of the previous interrupt process to the generation of the next interrupt process is utilized in S21 to S25. Repeat the above process. When there is an interrupt request in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is activated when the interrupt is enabled in S25. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is on in S23, that is, if the power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26 to execute the power-off process described next.

  Next, as the power-off process (S26 to S32), first, clear word 2 ("AAH") is set to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether the content of the power-off information flag is power-on normal data (S27). If it is the power-on normal information (S27: Yes), the power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, if it is not the power-on normal information (S27: No), the power-off abnormal data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

  Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, a complement to the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of the complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, the access prohibition of the RAM 103 is set (S32), and the processing is looped until the power is turned off.

<< Main control side timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the main control timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse every fixed time (for example, 4 ms) from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110, and is executed by interrupting the above-mentioned main control side main process.

  First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation condition is set (S51).

  Next, in order to restart the watchdog timer, clear word 2 ("AAH") is set (S52). At this time, the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 are sequentially written to the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within a preset timeout time, whereby the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted. That is, when the main CPU 101 executes the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are periodically set, whereby the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before it times out. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Next, input processing is executed (S53). In this input process, information on switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the big winning port switch 541, the general winning port switches 611 and 641, the door open switch, the frame open switch, the back set open switch, the magnetic sensor , The radio wave sensor, etc. are read, their state determination is performed, and the detected information is stored.

  Next, various random number update processing is executed (S54). In the various random number update processes, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation pattern random number are updated. For the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the numerical value of the random number counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value “0”. On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtraction result is less than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50000) is added to the subtraction result.

  Next, the initial value update type random number update process is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number updating process, the random number per symbol, the soft random number per special symbol and the symbol random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value "0". In addition, when the value of the counter makes one turn, the value of the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

  Next, initial value random number update processing is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per symbol, the software initial value random number per special symbol and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value "0".

  Next, timer subtraction processing is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for controlling the game operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are decremented by an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, final display time) relating to variable display and stop display by the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, and the like. A specified variation time is set to the special symbol game timer at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and is subtracted as the time elapses. In addition, when the small hit game of the special symbol of the other is executed during the fluctuation display of one of the special symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, while the small hit game is being executed, The timing of the variation display of the special symbol of is interrupted.

  Next, a second starting opening valid period setting process is executed (S58). In this second starting opening effective period setting process, the winning effective period and the winning ineffective period of the second starting opening 51 are determined, and the effective period data or the invalid period data of the second starting opening 51 is set as the determination result.

  Next, a prize monitoring process is executed (S59). In this prize monitoring process, the first start opening switch 511, the second start opening switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the special winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switch 611, and the combination operation gate switch in the input processing (S53) Based on the detection information of 911 and 921, the switch passage inspection of the gaming ball is performed, and as a result, when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed each switch, information indicating that the gaming ball has passed each switch is stored as main information As well as temporarily storing in the winning information storage area of the means 180, a transmission request of effect control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch, and the like are performed. The details of the prize monitoring process (S59) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a winning ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, a payout control command is sent to the payout control board 400 to instruct the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of prize, based on the detection result in the above-mentioned prize monitoring process, and the payout control board 400. Monitor the received data from the communication control board 400 and check the communication with the delivery control board 400.

  Next, a normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 is monitored, and when it is determined that the operation gate 53 is passed, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as operation holding ball information As well as updating the number of operation pending balls up to a maximum of four, storing the random numbers pertaining to the normal symbol lottery.

  Next, normal symbol control processing is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control processing, in order to perform a series of processing according to the normal symbol display device 75 or the normal motorized character 522, according to the value of the normal symbol game status, processing during normal symbol fluctuation, processing during normal symbol stop symbol display Execute processing during normal electric part operation, processing during demonstration of normal electric part operation end, and the like. In the normal symbol change processing, display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) in order to change or display the normal symbol.

  Next, the normal symbol variation start monitoring process is executed (S63). In this normal symbol variation start monitoring process, the operating state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the variation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol operation retention ball number is digested by one and the normal symbol The determination of success or failure, the determination of symbols, the determination of fluctuation patterns, the setting of fluctuation time, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, the starting opening monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this starting opening monitoring control process, when the winning of the first starting opening 51 and the second starting opening 52 of the gaming ball is monitored, and there is a winning of the gaming ball, the number of holding balls is updated and the special symbol lottery is concerned. The random number storage, the pre-reading advance notice effect judgment, the command request of the number of the figure memory and the like it does in order.

  Next, special symbol control processing is executed (S65). In this special symbol control processing, as a series of processing concerning the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, according to the value of the special symbol gaming status, the special symbol variation start processing (S420) described later in detail, the special symbol variation processing (S430) ), Special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440), etc. are executed.

  Next, a special motorized product control process is executed (S66). In this processing, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", as the operation processing according to the special motorized symbol 542, the setting of the operation start and the operation end of the special motorized symbol 542, large The opening time and opening number of the winning opening 54 are updated, the operation start setting of the probability fluctuation function, the operation start setting of the fluctuation time shortening function, the setting of the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the like are sequentially executed.

  Next, the special winning opening valid period setting process is executed (S67). In the special winning opening valid period setting process, the winning effective period and the winning invalid period of the special winning opening 54 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the special winning opening 54 is set as the determination result.

  Next, special symbol variation start monitoring control processing is executed (S68). In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process, when there is an operation holding ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the number of holding balls is digested by one, and the command request of the symbol memory number, the pass / fail judgment of the special symbol , Special symbol pattern determination, probability variation function determination, time reduction function determination, setting of operation pattern of special electric combination product, setting of demonstration effect time, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, abnormality detection processing is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the open circuit short circuit power source abnormal signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame open signal, etc. , It is determined whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, in order to request an error display from the effect control board 200, an effect control command ("error effect designating command") including the error information is generated.

  Next, the ball passing time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this ball passing time abnormality detection process, when the on signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or more, the ball passing time abnormality is set, and the effect control command (“error While performing the request of the effect designation command “), the output request of the security signal for outputting to the external terminal is performed.

  Next, a game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times the special motorized symbol 542 operates continuously (prescribed number of rounds), the number of operation reserved balls of the normal symbol and the special symbol, and the like are created. In addition, display data for causing the status indicator of the main control board 100 to display information on the error status detected in the above-mentioned abnormality detection processing is created.

  Next, LED output processing is performed (S72). In this LED output process, the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S65) is performed to display the special symbol and the normal symbol, the number of holding balls, the number of times the special motorized symbol is operated continuously, and the error. Display data created by abnormality detection processing (S69), gaming state display processing (S71), etc., each special symbol display device 71, 72, normal symbol display device 75, each special view reserve lamp 73, 74, general drawing reserve While outputting to the lamp 76 and the status indication lamp of the main control board 100, etc., the display in these various display devices is initialized.

  Next, emission control signal output processing is executed (S73). In this emission control signal output process, when communication abnormality with the payout control substrate 400 or disconnection short circuit power source abnormality is not detected, a signal of release permission is output to the payout control substrate 400, and release of the gaming ball is permitted. Do. On the other hand, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a disconnection short circuit power source abnormality is detected, a signal for prohibiting the firing is outputted to the payout control board 400, and the firing of the gaming ball is prohibited.

  Next, a solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, the ordinary symbol control process (S62) and the special motorized item control process (S66) are acquired in order to operate the respective motorized items 542. An excitation signal is output to each of the motorized combination solenoids 623, 643 based on the control data.

  Next, an effect control command transmission process is executed (S75). In this effect control command transmission process, the effect control command specified by the pointer is read out from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage unit 180 in the above process, and this effect is produced. A control command is transmitted to the effect control board 200.

  Next, external information output processing is executed (S76). In this external information output process, game information relating to the game machine PM is output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external information terminal board 600. As this external information signal, for example, prize ball signal, door frame open signal, magnetic sensor abnormality signal, open circuit short circuit power supply abnormality signal, abnormality sensor detection (entering ball passage time abnormality etc.) signal, big hit signal, continuous signal, There is a symbol determination signal etc.

  Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enabled state (S77). As a result, the main control timer interrupt process is terminated and the process returns to the main control main process, and the main control main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

  When the main control board 100 detects a power cut (a decrease in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold) during main control side main processing or interrupt processing, a non-maskable interrupt is generated to turn on the power cut confirmation flag. Do. Then, after returning to the original processing, the above-mentioned power-off time processing (S26 to S32) is executed.

«Prize winning monitoring process»
Next, the prize monitoring process (S59) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the details of the prize monitoring process (S59).

  First, the first start port switch input process is executed (S101). In the first starting opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first starting opening switch 511 is input. When the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 511 is input, the first starting opening winning data indicating that the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 51 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage unit 180. While storing, it generates a first starting opening winning command and temporarily stores it in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the first start port switch 511, the process proceeds to the next step.

  Subsequently, a second start port switch input process is executed (S102). In the second start port switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the second start port switch 521 is input. When the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 521 is input, the second starting opening winning data indicating that the gaming ball has entered the second starting opening 52 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage unit 180. While storing, it generates a second starting opening winning command and temporarily stores it in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the second start port switch 521, the process proceeds to the next step.

  Next, operation gate switch input processing is executed (S103). In the actuation gate switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the actuation gate switch 531 is input. When a detection signal from the actuation gate switch 531 is input, actuation gate winning data indicating that the gaming ball has passed the actuation gate 53 is temporarily stored in the prize information storage area of the main information storage unit 180, and the actuation gate winning is achieved. A command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the operation gate switch 531, the process proceeds to the next step.

  Subsequently, a combination operation gate switch input process is executed (S104). In the combination operation gate switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the combination operation gate switches 911, 921 is input. When the detection signal from the combination operation gate switch 911, 921 is input, the combination operation gate winning data indicating that the gaming ball has passed the combination operation gate 911, 921 is the winning information storage of the main information storage means 180 While temporarily storing in the area (turning on the combination operation gate passing flag), the combination operation gate winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the combination operation gate switch 911, 921 the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

  Subsequently, the special winning opening switch input process is executed (S105). In the special winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the special winning opening switch 541 is input. When the detection signal from the special winning opening switch 541 is input, the special winning opening winning data indicating that the gaming ball has entered the special winning opening 54 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage unit 180. , A special winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the special winning opening switch 541, the process proceeds to the next step.

  Subsequently, the general winning opening switch processing is executed (S106). In the general winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the general winning opening switch 611 is input. When a detection signal from the general winning opening switch 611 is input, general winning opening winning data indicating that the gaming ball has entered the general winning openings 61 to 63 is temporarily stored in the winning data storage area of the main information storage unit 180. At the same time, a general winning a prize opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the general winning a prize opening switch 611, this winning a prize supervisory processing ends.

«Special symbol game processing»
Next, a series of processes relating to the special symbol game in the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The processing related to the special symbol game includes the above-mentioned start opening monitoring control processing (S64), the special symbol control processing (S65), the special electric character control processing (S66), the special symbol variation start monitoring control processing (S68), etc. Is the case.

(Starting opening monitoring control processing)
First, the starting opening monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the details of the starting opening monitoring control process (S64).

  First, it is determined whether or not a game winning on the first starting opening 51 has been detected (S201). If a prize winning on the first starting opening 51 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit number 4 (S202).

  When the operation reserve ball number of the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), a random number per special symbol, a symbol random number per special symbol, a special symbol as a lottery random number according to the first special symbol game The variation pattern random number value is acquired, and each random number value is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage unit 180 according to the order of ball entry (S203). Then, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter is incremented by 1 (S204) as the update of the operation holding ball number of the first special symbol (S204), and the winning check of the first starting opening 51 is ended.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a game winning on the second starting opening 52 has been detected (S205). If a winning on the second starting opening 52 has been detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit number 4 (S206). When the operation reserve ball number of the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), a random number value per special symbol, a symbol random number value per special symbol, a special symbol as a lottery random number value according to the second special symbol game The variation pattern random number value is acquired, and each random number value is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage unit 180 according to the order of ball entry (S207). Then, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter is incremented by one (S208) as the update of the operation holding ball number of the second special symbol (S208), and the winning check of the second starting opening 52 is ended.

  Subsequently, whether or not there is an update of the number of actuation reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, ie, whether or not the number of actuation reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is added in S204 or S208. It is determined (S209). If there is an update of the number of operation pending balls (S209: YES), a symbol memory number command including information of the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is used as the main information storage means It is stored in the 180 command storage area (S210).

  Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is a prior determination timing (S211). If it is the prior determination timing (S211: YES), it generates the pre-reading determination information based on the various random numbers acquired at the starting opening winning combination, so the random symbol buffer (pending n storage area or register etc.) A numerical value is read out, and a yes / no decision is made (S212). Then, a success / failure predetermination command including information of the predetermination result (success / failure predetermination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S213).

  Also, the symbol random number per special symbol is read out from the symbol random number buffer, and symbol prior determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol prior determination command including information of the prior determination result (symbol prior determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S215). Furthermore, the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value is read out from the fluctuation pattern random number buffer, and fluctuation pattern prior determination is performed (S216). Then, a variation pattern prior determination command including information of the prior determination result (a variation pattern prior determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S217).

(Special symbol variation start monitoring control process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68).

  In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68), of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special symbol variation start monitoring process described later for the special symbol side satisfying the variation start condition (S305, S309) is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the variation start condition, as described above, the special symbol variation start monitoring process for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol ( S305 and S309) are executed in parallel.

  First, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is medium or small (S301). Subsequently, it is determined whether the first special symbol is in change standby, that is, whether the first special symbol game status is "00H (during change)" (S302). If the first special symbol is waiting for change (S302: YES), it is determined whether the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is "0" (S303). When the operation reserve ball number of the first special symbol is not "0" (S303: NO), that is, when the operation suspension sphere of the first special symbol exists, the variation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied After setting the address of the first special symbol variation start monitoring table (the address of the various tables and the address of the RAM storage area used in the subsequent processing) to be regarded as having been set (S305), the first special symbol side special It shifts to the design fluctuation start supervision processing (S310).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the second special symbol is in change standby, that is, whether the second special symbol game status is "00H (during change)" (S306). If the second special symbol is waiting for change (S306: YES), it is determined whether the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is "0" (S307). When the operation reserve ball number of the second special symbol is not "0" (S307: NO), that is, when the operation suspension sphere of the second special symbol is present, the variation start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied After setting the address of the second special symbol variation start monitoring table (the address of various tables and the address of the RAM storage area used in the subsequent processing) to be considered as having been set (S308), the first special symbol side special It shifts to the design fluctuation start supervision processing (S309). The details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the change start conditions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S306: NO, S307: YES), the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305) , S309).

(Special symbol change start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309).

  In this special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309), with reference to the first special symbol variation start monitoring table or the second special symbol variation start monitoring table set in S304 or S308 described above, of this variation start Although the processing of the special symbol side to be targeted is to be executed, since the method of processing is common between the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except in the special case, the first special symbol side It is collectively explained without distinction whether it is processing or processing of the 2nd special symbol side, and is explained.

  First, the number of operation reserved balls on the side of the special symbol to be subjected to the start of fluctuation this time is decremented by 1 (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S312). Subsequently, the special symbol hold storage area on the special symbol side targeted for the variation start this time is accessed, and a random number per special symbol stored in the first hold storage area (hold 1 storage area), special symbol per The symbol random number value and the special symbol variation pattern random number value are read out in order, and these random number values are used in the special symbol qualifying process (S320), the symbol determining process (S330) and the variation pattern selecting process (S423) described later. It is transferred to the special symbol conformity determination area, the special symbol pattern determination area, and the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 (S313). Further, as updating of the pending storage area, the pending ball information stored in the pending 2 storage area to the pending 4 storage area is shifted to the lower pending storage area, and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

  Subsequently, special symbol propriety judgment processing is executed (S320). In the special symbol compliance determination process (S320), first, a special symbol compliance lottery table is acquired. At this time, when the gaming state is a special symbol probability variation state, a high probability success or failure lottery table is acquired, and when the gaming state is a normal state, a low probability success or failure lottery table is acquired. Next, a random value per special symbol is read out from the special symbol compliance determination area of the main information storage means 180. Then, with reference to the special symbol odds lottery table, based on the random number value per special symbol, to determine whether the special symbol success or failure. In addition, the value (the big hit data “55H”, the small hit data “33H”, the outlying data “00H”) corresponding to the result of the yes / no determination is stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  Subsequently, symbol determination processing is executed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), the stop symbol of the special symbol and the character effect number (variation added symbol information) are determined according to the result of the pass / fail determination. Then, the stop symbol (symbol group) of the special symbol determined this time and the character effect number are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage means 180. In addition, the character production number is the type of the stop symbol (symbol group) determined and the operation state of the probability variation function of the special symbol and the normal symbol (the probability variation of the special symbol / the probability variation of the special symbol / the probability variation of the normal symbol on / Determined on the basis of the combination of 4 patterns of probability variation off of normal pattern). When the result of the pass / fail determination is an out-of-order, the character effect number “0” is determined.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the result of the success or failure judgment of the special symbol corresponds to the small hit (S341), and it is determined whether the result of the success or failure judgment of the special symbol corresponds to the big hit (S342). When the result of the success or failure judgment of the special symbol is a small hit (S341: YES), the process proceeds to S349, and when the result of the success / failure determination for the special symbol is a loss (S341: NO, S342: NO), the condition is S351. Transition.

  If the result of the success or failure of the special symbol is a big hit (S341: NO, S342: YES), it is determined whether the success or failure data of the other special symbol is the big hit data (big hit data "55H") ( S343). If the success or failure judgment data of the other special symbol is the big hit data (S343: YES), the result of the success / failure determination of the special symbol derived in S320 is “off” from the “big hit” in order to prohibit duplication of the big hit. Replace with and move on to S351.

  Next, based on the type (big hit type) of the symbol group determined in S330 above and the gaming state at the time of the big hit, the number of probability fluctuations is determined as the number of times the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol operates after the end of the big hit game. To do (S345). In addition, based on the type (big hit type) of the symbol group determined in S330 and the gaming state at the time of the big hit, the number of times the variation time is shortened as the number of times the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated after the big hit game is over. (S346). Furthermore, based on the type (big hit type) of the symbol group determined in the above S330 and the gaming state at the time of the big hit, the number of times of entering the ball is determined as the number of times the power chew support function is activated after the end of the big hit game. (S347). The determination results (the number of probability fluctuations, the number of fluctuation time reductions, and the number of easy entering states) are stored in the time saving number storage area of the main information storage unit 180 and the number of easy entering states storage area. Subsequently, based on the type (big hit type) of the symbol group determined in S330, the operation pattern of the special electric role 542 during the big hit game (round game) is set (S348). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric character 542, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, the open pattern (maximum open time) of the big winning opening 54 in each round, and the like are set.

  Next, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330 and the current gaming state, the variation pattern selection state after the big hit game end or after the small hit game is set (S349). Subsequently, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330, a demonstration effect time (hit start demonstration time and hit end demonstration time) of the special game (big hit game or small hit game) is set (S350). Next, the special symbol suitability determination area and the special symbol design determination area of the main information storage unit 180 used in the above-mentioned special symbol suitability determination processing (S320) and the symbol determination processing (S330) are cleared (S351). Then, the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be subject to variation this time is transited from "00H (during standby)" to "01H (variation start)" (S352).

(Special symbol control process)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control process (S65).

  First, it is determined whether the special electric combination 542 is inactive or not, that is, whether the special combination game status is "00H (waiting state)" (S401). If special electric combination 542 is inactive (S401: YES), it is determined whether the first special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S402). If the first special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S402: YES), the first special symbol control table (used in the subsequent processing) is executed to execute the processing relating to the first special symbol. The addresses of various tables and the address of the RAM storage area are set (S403), and the processing proceeds to special symbol control general processing (S404). On the other hand, if the first special symbol game status is "00H (standby)" (S402: NO), it is determined whether the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S405) ). If the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S405: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent processing) is executed to execute the processing relating to the second special symbol. The addresses of various tables and the address of the RAM storage area are set (S406), and the processing proceeds to special symbol control general processing (S407).

  In addition, in the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407), using the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above-described S403 or S406, the special symbol to be subjected to the current variation Although the processing on the side will be executed, since the method of processing is common to the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, is it the processing of the first special symbol side except in a special case, It will be described collectively without distinction as to whether it is the processing of the second special symbol side. The details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol control general processing)
Subsequently, special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S404, S407). Here, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407).

  In this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407), branch processing (S411 to S414) is performed to shift to processing according to the value ("01H", "02H", "03H") of the special symbol gaming status. Do. First, it is determined whether the special symbol game status on the special symbol side subject to the current variation is not zero (S411). If the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "01H (variation start)" (S412). If the special symbol game status is "01H" (S412: YES), the process proceeds to special symbol variation start processing (S420). The details of the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if NO in S412, it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "02H (during change)" (S413). If the special symbol game status is "02H" (S413: YES), the processing proceeds to special symbol variation processing (S430). The details of the special symbol variation process (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. If NO in S413, it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "03H (during stop symbol display)" (S414). If the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440). The details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

(Special symbol change start process)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process (S420).

  First, the special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the success or failure lottery and the variation pattern selection state (S421). Subsequently, a special symbol variation pattern random number value is read out from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 (S422). Then, referring to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random value (S423).

  Next, a fluctuation time corresponding to the currently selected fluctuation pattern is set (S424). Then, as the setting of the start of the change of the special symbol, the change time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S 425), and the change start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S 426). As the change start command, in order to start the symbol change effect in the effect display device 70, the communication inspection command, the change added pattern information specification command, the change pattern specification command, and the pattern specification command are sequentially generated, and these are main information storage means Store in 180 command storage areas.

  Subsequently, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 used to determine the variation pattern are cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "01H (start of change)" to "02H (during change)" (S428).

(Process during special symbol change)
Next, special symbol variation processing (S430) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation process (S430).

  First, it is determined whether the fluctuation suspension flag is on (S430). In addition, a "variation interruption flag" is a flag which shows that the small hit game is performed as the other special symbol game. When the change suspension flag is off (S430: NO), that is, when the small hit game is not being executed as the other special symbol game, in order to perform the variable display of the special symbol, the display pattern number switching process during change Execute (S431). In this changing display pattern number switching process (S 431), display pattern number data is generated during the change display or the stop display of the special symbol every predetermined switching time. The display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) in order to change or display the special symbol.

  On the other hand, when the flag during fluctuation is on (S430: YES), that is, when the small hit game is being executed as the other special symbol game, the fluctuation display of the special symbol to be processed is interrupted, so the fluctuation is interrupted. The middle display pattern number switching process is executed (S432). In this variation interruption display pattern number switching process (S432), display pattern number data during suspension of the variation display of the special symbol is generated every predetermined switching time. The display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) to interrupt the variable symbol display of the special symbol.

  Next, it is determined whether the special symbol game timer has become "0 (timeout)", that is, whether the variation time of the special symbol has ended (S433). If the variation time of the special symbol is over (S433: YES), the stop symbol of the special symbol to be determined and displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 is set (S434).

  Then, it is determined whether the pass / fail determination data of the special symbol set in S320 is the big hit data (S435). If the success or failure judgment data is the jackpot data (S 435: YES), it is judged whether or not the other special symbol is variably displayed (S 436). If the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S 436: YES), even if the variation time of the other special symbol is before reaching the prescribed fluctuation time, the other special symbol's fluctuation symbol is forced. (S437). That is, the variation display of the other off or small hit is forcibly stopped by the off pattern. Subsequently, a change stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to display the decorative symbol is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S438).

  Next, "500 (ms)" is stored in the special symbol game timer as the finalized display time (S439). In addition, "determination display time" is time which makes a stop symbol stop display definite at the time of the fluctuation | variation stop of a special symbol. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "02H (during variation)" to "03H (during stop symbol display)" (S440).

(Process during special symbol stop symbol display)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol display process (S440) will be described. 33 to 34 are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has become "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the finalized display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has ended (S441). Here, when the finalized display time of the special symbol is finished (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is transited from "03H (during stop symbol display)" to "00H (during standby)" (S442).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the success or failure determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180 is the big hit data "55H" (S443). If the hit or not judgment data is a big hit data (S443: YES), the special symbol probability fluctuation function operation stop (S444), the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function operation stop (S445), the power chew support function operation Stop (S446) is performed in order. Specifically, "00H (off)" is set to the probability change flag, and "00H" is set to the probability fluctuation number counter, the fluctuation time reduction number counter and the easy entering ball number counter to clear them to zero.

  Next, as a start demonstration setting process of the special game, a start demonstration display time is set, and an effect control command (big hit start demonstration command) for instructing start of the start demonstration effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of times of execution of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state number counter) is cleared to zero (S448). Further, the special electric role thing game status is transited from "00H (waiting state)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, "00H" is set to clear the content of the success or failure determination flag (S450).

  On the other hand, when the success / failure determination data is not the big hit data (S443: NO), it is determined whether the probability variation function of the special symbol is in operation (S451). When the probability variation function of the special symbol is in operation (S 451: YES), the probability variation number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as a part of the variation number of the special symbol this time (step S 452) . Subsequently, it is determined whether the probability variation frequency counter is zero (step S453). If the probability variation number counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol is stopped (S454). If the probability variation number counter after subtraction is not zero (S 453: NO), S 454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S 455.

  Next, it is determined whether the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is in operation (S455). When the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is in operation (S455: YES), the time reduction number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as a part of the variation number of the special symbol this time (step S456) . Subsequently, it is determined whether the time saving number counter is zero (step S457). If the time reduction number counter is zero (S 457: YES), it is determined that the number of times the special symbol time reduction state has ended, and the operation of the variation time reduction function of the special symbol is stopped (S 458). If the time reduction number counter after subtraction is not zero (S 457: NO), S 458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S 459.

  Next, it is determined whether the electronic chew support function is in operation (S459). When the electric chew support function is in operation (S459: YES), the easy entry state number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as a digesting amount of the variation number of the special symbol this time (step S460) . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the easy-to-enter-state number counter is zero (step S461). If the easy-to-enter-state number counter is zero (S461: YES), it is determined that the end number of the easy-to-enter state has been reached, and the operation of the electric chow support function is stopped (S462). If the entry easy state number counter after subtraction is not zero (S 461: NO), S 462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S 463.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 (S463). Then, the variation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached a preset number of ends. If it has reached, it is switched to the fluctuation pattern selection state defined next. On the other hand, if the end number has not been reached, the current fluctuation pattern selection state is maintained.

  Next, a presentation control command (gaming state designation command) including the current gaming state information and variation pattern selection state information updated in the above-mentioned S451 to S464 is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. (S465). In addition, on the effect control board 200 side, setting and updating of the effect mode are executed based on the information of the game state designation command.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the small hit data "33H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466). If small hit data is stored (S466: YES), it is determined whether or not the other special symbol is variably displayed (S467). If the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S 467: YES), the fluctuation suspension flag set in the main information storage means 180 is turned on (S 468). That is, in response to the small hit game being executed for the special symbol to be subjected to the processing, the fluctuation suspension flag is turned on to interrupt the fluctuation display of the other special symbol. In addition, when the other special symbol is not in the change display (S 467: NO), S 468 is skipped.

  Next, as a small hit game start demonstration setting process, a start demonstration display time is set, and an effect control command (small hit start demonstration command) instructing generation of a start demonstration effect is generated (S469). Subsequently, the special electric role thing game status changes from "00H (waiting state)" to "02H (small hit game)" (S470). Then, "00H" is set to clear the content of the special symbol determination flag (S471).

  On the other hand, when small hit data "33H" is not stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466: NO), that is, when the offset data "00H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag, S467 to S471 are skip. When the special symbol determination flag is outlier data, the reason for not processing to clear the contents of the flag is that “00H” is originally stored as outlier data.

(Special electric role control process)
Next, the special motorized product control process (S66) will be described. FIG. 35 to FIG. 37 are flowcharts showing the details of the motorized prize control process (S66).

  First, it is determined whether the special electric role thing game status is "01H (special game)" (S501). If the special electric combination game status is "01H" (S501: YES), it is determined whether the combination operation gate passage flag is on (S502). When the combination operation gate passage flag is on (S502: YES), special game processing is executed in the subsequent processing. In the special game process, first, it is determined whether the special electric combination 542 is in operation (S503). If the special electric symbol 542 is not in operation (S503: NO), it is determined whether it is the operation start time of the special electric symbol 542 (S504). The operation start time of the special electric symbol 542 is the timing at which the special electric symbol 542 starts to operate in each round game.

  If it is the operation start time of the special motorized prize 542 (S504: YES), a production control command (round production designation command) is generated to start the round production, and this is stored in the command of the main information storage unit 180 It stores in the area (S505). In addition, on the effect control board 200 side, the round effect corresponding to each round game in the special game is executed based on the information (information such as the current number of rounds) of this round effect designating command. Then, the operation of the special motorized product 542 is started (S506), and the processing of S507 to S511 is executed as the process during the operation of the special motorized product 542.

  As processing during the operation of the special electric combination 542, while it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the specified count number (maximum number of winnings) in the special winning opening 54 (S507), the operation time of the special combination electric 542 It is determined whether (opening time) has passed (S508). At this time, when the game ball has won the specified number (maximum number of winnings) in the special winning opening 54 (S507: YES), or when the operation time of the special electric combination 542 has passed (S508: YES), the special The operation of the motorized workpiece 542 is stopped (S509). Then, it is determined whether the number of times of continuous operation of the special motorized product 542 has reached a predetermined specified number of rounds (S510). If the number of continuous operations has not reached the prescribed number of rounds (S510: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric symbol 542 is incremented by one (S511).

  On the other hand, when the number of times of continuous operation of the special electric character 542 has reached the specified number of rounds (S510: YES), the process proceeds to S512, and the end demonstration display time is set as the end demonstration setting process for the special game. At the same time, an effect control command (big hit end demonstration command) instructing the start of the end demonstration effect is generated (S512).

  Next, the probability fluctuation number information determined in S345 is stored in the probability fluctuation number counter (S513). Further, the fluctuation time reduction frequency information determined in S346 is stored in the fluctuation time reduction frequency counter (S514). Further, the easy-to-enter-state number information determined in S347 is stored in the easy-to-enter-state number counter (S515).

  Subsequently, with reference to the type (big hit type) of the symbol group determined in S340, it is determined whether or not the operation of the condition device is an operation with a specific symbol (so-called odd symbol) (S516). When it is the operation of the condition device by the specific symbol (S516: YES), the data at the time of operation "64H" is stored in the probability fluctuation number counter of the main information storage means 180, and the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is started (S517). On the other hand, when it is not the operation of the condition device by the specific symbol (S516: NO), the non-operation data "00H" is stored in the probability fluctuation number counter, and S517 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the fluctuation time reduction frequency information set in S514 is the fluctuation time reduction function operation data (data other than "00H") (S518). If it is the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S518: YES), the operation of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is started (S519). On the other hand, if it is not the fluctuation time shortening function activation data (S518: NO), S519 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the easy-to-enter-state frequency information set in S515 is the electric chow support function operation data (data other than "00H") (S520). If it is the electric chow support function operation data (S520: YES), the operation of the electric chow support function is started (S521 to S523). That is, the operation start of the probability variation function of the normal symbol (S521), the operation start of the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol (S522), and the operation start of the open extension function of the ordinary electric character 522 (S523) are sequentially executed. On the other hand, if it is not the electric chow support function operation data, S521 to S523 are skipped.

  Next, it switches to the variation pattern selection state determined in the above S349 (S524). Subsequently, an effect control command (playing state designating command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in the above-mentioned S513 to S524 is generated, and this is stored in the main information storage unit 180. It stores in the command storage area (S525). In addition, on the effect control board 200 side, the effect mode after the special game and the like are set based on the information of the game state designation command. Then, the special electric role thing game status changes from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting state)" (S526).

  On the other hand, when the special electric role thing game status is not "01H (special game)" (S501: NO), the process proceeds to S530, and whether the special electric role thing game status is "02H (small hit game)" It is determined whether or not (S530). When the special electric role thing game status is "02H" (S530: YES), small hit game processing is executed in the subsequent processing.

  In the small hit game processing, first, it is determined whether the special electric combination 542 is in operation (S531). When the special motorized item 542 is not in operation (S531: NO), the special electric symbol 542 starts to be operated (S532). On the other hand, when the special electric symbol 542 is in operation (S531: YES), S532 is skipped.

  Subsequently, as processing during operation of the special electric combination 542, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the maximum winning number in the large winning opening 54 (S533), and the operation time of the special combination 542 (opening time It is determined whether time has elapsed (S534). At this time, if the game ball has won the specified number (maximum number of winnings) in the special winning opening 54 (S533: YES), or if the operation time of the special electric combination 542 has elapsed (S534: YES), the special The operation of the motorized workpiece 542 is stopped (S535).

  Next, with the end of the small hit game, the change suspension flag is turned off (S536). In addition, the interruption state is canceled about the fluctuation display of the other special symbol in response to this fluctuation interruption flag being turned off, the fluctuation display is resumed (the fluctuation display by the special symbol game timer is concerned) Measurement of fluctuation time is resumed).

  Subsequently, an end demonstration display time is set as an end demonstration setting process for the small hit game, and an effect control command (small hitting end demonstration command) instructing generation of an end demonstration effect is generated (S537). Subsequently, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state determined in the above-mentioned S347 (S538). Then, the effect control command (gaming state designation command) including the variation pattern selection state information after the special game set in S537 is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 ( S539). The game state specification command is used on the side of the effect control board 200 to determine the transition trigger of the effect mode, to specify the effect mode to which the transition is made, and the like. Then, the special electric role thing game status changes from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting state)" (S540).

<Process on the production control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation process in the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 38 to 43. The process on the side of the effect control board 200 is reset start process (including main process on the effect control side) which is executed when the sub main CPU 201 is reset such as after the power is turned on, and the effect control side timer interrupt activated every predetermined cycle. Processing, reception interruption processing of effect control command activated due to strobe signal from main control board 100, and lamp activated with arrival of predetermined occurrence time specified in time schedule of variation effect pattern It is configured to include the effect interruption process and the transmission interruption process of the image control command activated every predetermined period.

  In each interrupt process (exception process), a priority level indicating a priority when multiple interrupt processes occur is set. In this example, "Reset start processing by power reset: highest priority", "Reset start processing by various abnormalities: highest priority"-> "Interpretation control command reception interrupt processing: level 7"-"by WDT (during runaway detection) Reset start processing: level 3 "→" image control command transmission interrupt processing: level 2 "→" effect control side timer interrupt processing: level 1 "and the like are prioritized in order of priority level. Note that “Reset start processing at the time of various abnormalities” is, for example, DMA (Direct Memory) when the sub main CPU 201 tries to access by an invalid area or an illegal method when the sub main CPU 201 executes an illegal instruction. Access) Start up when an error occurs during transfer. In the present embodiment, the above-described plural types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but in reality, other interrupt processing also exists.

  In the effect control side main processing, basically, the processing is advanced after being set in any state of all interrupts inhibited or interrupts inhibited other than the effect control command reception interrupt. After that, when the effect control side main process is in the interrupt enabled state, each interrupt process is started in the form of interrupting the main process. In each interrupt process, when there is a request for another interrupt process during the execution of the interrupt process (a multiple interrupt occurs), it is basically an interrupt process with a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed. While the interrupt request is permitted, the interrupt request is inhibited if the interrupt processing has a lower priority level or the same priority level than the interrupt processing being executed. That is, each interrupt process is performed in a state in which other interrupts with the same priority level or lower priority levels are prohibited. Then, each interruption process returns to the effect control side main process in a state in which all interruptions are permitted. In addition, the priority (priority level) of such an interruption factor is prescribed by the register setting of the effect control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<< Reset start processing >>
First, the reset start process of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the reset start process of the effect control board 200. In this reset start process, the power is turned on, the reset caused by various abnormalities, or the reset caused by WDT (due to runaway detection) is activated, and the security check of the sub main CPU 201 is performed. , The program is started, and the processing after S601 is started.

  First, as an initial setting necessary at power-on, the start address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is inhibited until the various initial settings are completed (S602).

  Subsequently, as a basic setting regarding hardware, an initial value is set in a built-in register provided in the sub main CPU 201, and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Further, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the effect control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, an initial value is set to a variable with an initial value, and initialization is performed by clearing 0 to a variable having no initial value. Further, the sub main CPU 201 appropriately develops the control program stored in the ROM 202 in the RAM 203.

  Subsequently, interrupts other than the reception interrupt process of the effect control command are prohibited (S605). Next, processing is performed to set the type of error to be validated for the model among the various errors set in advance for all models (S 606). Further, a turn-off request is made to put all of the effect lamps LP (the frame lamp 10 and the panel lamp 80) in the off state (S607). Then, a watchdog timer is activated to monitor runaway of the sub main CPU 201 (S 608).

  Subsequently, a main effect control process is executed as a main process of the game effect (S609). The details of the effect control side main process (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, when it shifts to the effect control side main processing in S609, the return from the main processing to the reset start processing can not normally be made, but in the case where the processing returns to this processing by the occurrence of a bug of the program. Transition to the low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which the power consumption is reduced compared to that in the normal operation.

<< main processing of production control side >>
Next, the effect control side main process (S609) of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing effect control side main processing (S609).

  First, in the effect control side main processing, an address (head address where the program is developed) for acquiring a check as to whether or not the control program is correctly developed in the RAM 203 is acquired (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (activation of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

  Next, the device initialization operation is performed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once at the time of power on (when reset starts) of the pachinko gaming machine PM, and in order to control the operation of the movable part 24 by a device such as a motor or a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the position information required for At the end of the initialization operation, the movable part 24 returns to a preset initial position (reference position).

  Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared to restart the watchdog timer (S614). At this time, when the sub main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, the watchdog timer is configured to write a predetermined clear word in the WDT clear register of the sub main CPU 201 within a preset timeout time. It is cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Subsequently, an input port check process is executed (S615). In this input port check processing, monitoring of reading of the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) in port input / output processing S912 in timer interrupt processing described later is monitored at each interrupt generation, and monitoring is performed several times (for example, four times). The signal level is “1 (H level)” if all the input port states are “1”, “0 (L level)” if all “0”, otherwise the signal level is Do not change (this determines the input signal).

  Subsequently, an error presentation management process is executed (S616). In this error presentation management process, based on the error presentation pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S 622), the error presentation by various devices is started. Furthermore, in the error presentation management process, the error management timer is set to an initial value (error presentation time) to manage the progression of the error presentation. The error management timer is decremented and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (S920) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. Then, if the error management timer has timed out, the error presentation is ended.

  Subsequently, an effect button monitor control process is executed (S617). In this effect button monitoring control process, when the button advance effect is incorporated during the fluctuation of the symbol, the input state of the effect button 15 within the predetermined operation effective time is monitored, and the information regarding the input state of the effect button 15 Hold.

  Subsequently, a notice lottery management process is executed (S618). In this notice lottery management process, a notice effect pattern defining the contents of the notice effect to be generated at each stage of the change process of the decorative symbol along the scenario of the change effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620) Determined by lottery. The notice effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage means 260. Also, an image control command for designating the preview effect pattern number to the image control board 300 is generated, and this is set in the image control command buffer of the sub main information storage unit 260. At this time, when the bonus announcement presentation pattern is selected as the announcement presentation pattern, an appointment request is generated, and the drive pattern of the movable office 24 is specified in the subsequent device management process (S619). . In this example, the main loop processing efficiency is improved instead of drawing all of the plurality of types of advance notice effects (notice effect effect patterns) generated within one variation of the decorative symbol in one main loop process. In order to make it perform, it is divided into every occurrence time (for example, fluctuation start stage, reach generation stage, fluctuation stop stage) of advance notice effect, and it is the composition which draws the lottery over plural times main loop processing. At that time, since it is necessary to synchronize with the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (send the image control command immediately) about the notice effect which occurs at the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the lottery is made in the main loop processing of the start. It is supposed to be done.

  Next, device management processing is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there are operation requests (lamp request and feature request) of various devices in the command analysis process (S620) described later, plural types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern) stored in the ROM 203 Among them, the pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, feature preview effect number) is specified, and control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, lamp data associated with each frame time (time required to update an image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In this example, one frame time corresponds to the time required for the drawing process of one frame when drawing etc. at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) in the effect display device 70. Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the movable part 24, drive data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at fixed intervals, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, when the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is all completed, the effect lamp LP is turned off, or the operation of the movable part 24 is stopped. , End control of the target device.

  Subsequently, command analysis processing (S620) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read and the read effect control command Execute the effect control process corresponding to the type of. The details of the command analysis process (S620) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, it is determined whether or not command analysis (analysis of effect control command) has been executed during the current loop processing (S621). If the command has just been analyzed (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 to shift to the next loop process. On the other hand, when the command analysis is not executed (S621: NO), that is, when the command buffer is empty, the effect lottery random number updating process is executed until a predetermined time passes (S622). In the present embodiment, “16 ms” which is a half of the minimum unit (32 ms) of the switching control of the lamp LP is set as the predetermined time. In this effect lottery random number update process, various effect lottery random numbers such as a pre-reading notice lottery random number, a decorative symbol random number, a fluctuation effect pattern random number, and a notice effect pattern random number are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the command analysis process (S622) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing details of the command analysis process (S622). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether the effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260, and the effect corresponding to the type of effect control command stored. Execute control processing.

  First, it is determined whether a game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S631). When the gaming state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process shifts to effect state transition processing (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), a process of transitioning the effect mode is executed based on the gaming state information and the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the hold related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S633). Here, the hold related command includes a symbol storage number command and an advance determination command. If the hold related command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to the hold information management process (S634). In this suspension information management process (S 634), the symbol storage number command or the prior determination command is read out from the sub main information storage means 260, and the prefetching determination is executed based on the information of the prior determination result. A process is performed to update the display number and display mode (display color etc.) of the hold image displayed on the display unit 710.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a symbol variation related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol variation related command includes a variation start command and a variation stop command. If the symbol variation related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to variation effect content determination processing (S636). In this variation effect content determination process (S636), when the received symbol variation related command is a variation start command, a process for starting the variation effect of the decoration symbol is executed, and the received symbol variation related command stops variation If it is a command, processing for ending the change effect of the decorative symbol is executed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a big hit effect related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S637). Here, the jackpot production related command includes a jackpot start demonstration command, a round presentation specification command, and a jackpot end demonstration command. If the jackpot effect related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to the jackpot effect content determination process (S638). In the jackpot effect content determination process (S638), a process for executing a start demonstration effect, a round effect, and an end demonstration effect is performed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether a small hit effect related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S639). Here, the small hit production related command includes a small hit start demonstration command and a small hit end demonstration command. If the small hit effect related command is stored (step S639: YES), the process proceeds to the small hit effect content determination process (S640). In the small hit effect content determination process (S640), a process for executing a small hit start demonstration effect and a small hit end demonstration effect is performed.

  Subsequently, it is judged whether or not an error presentation designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub information storage means 280 (S641). If the error presentation designation command is stored (S641: YES), the process goes to error presentation content determination processing (S642). In this error effect content determination process (S642), an error effect specification command is read out from the sub information storage means 280, and an error effect pattern for notifying an error condition by lighting of the effect lamp LP or sound of the speaker 11 is determined. .

  If no effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub information storage unit 280 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO), nothing is done. End command analysis processing.

<< Reception interrupt processing of production control command >>
Next, a reception interrupt process of the effect control command will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process of effect control command. In the reception interrupt process of this effect control command, as described above, it is started when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt process. It is supposed to be. The effect control command is configured to include 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, MODE data is also referred to as “first command”, and EVENT data is also referred to as “second command”.

  First, when an interrupt based on a strobe signal from the main control board 100 occurs, it is determined whether the input value of the effect control command has been determined (S901). Specifically, the command data is read up to five times, and the input value is determined when the same value is read twice in a row. This is because reading of the effect control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not determined until the same value is read twice in a row.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). If the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, the effect lottery random number is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S904). In addition, as for the acquisition time of the effect lottery random number, it is assumed that the effect control command is received when the effect control command is received, and the effect control command is transmitted at irregular timing such as the start winning of the game ball or the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is to prevent periodicity at the acquisition time by using it as a trigger. As described above, by making the acquisition time of the effect lottery random number irregular, it becomes difficult to generate inconveniences such as the same effect being repeated unnaturally and repeatedly even in various effect lottery.

  On the other hand, if the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control command is received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether or not there is any contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of effect control commands (S 905: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (pointer for writing) is acquired (S 906). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub main information storage unit 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S 907). The stored command data is read out in the command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of the effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909). Then, the effect control command reception interrupt process is ended, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

<< Production control timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the effect control timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing effect control timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is activated by clock pulses at regular time intervals, and is executed in a form of interrupting the effect control side main process described above.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the sub main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and the processes after S911 are sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, an interrupt with priority level 2 or higher, such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100, a watchdog timer interrupt, etc., is permitted (S911).

  Subsequently, port input / output processing is executed (S912). In this port input / output processing, input processing and output processing of port data in the I / O port circuit 204 are performed. In the input process, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub main information storage unit 260 are read out and output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port).

  Subsequently, device control data output processing is executed (S913). In this device control data output process, drive data for a predetermined time is read out from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in the device control data output process, the drive data is switched at every interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

  Next, the effect timer update process is executed (S914). In this effect timer update process, the values of various effect timers used for effect operation control are subtracted and updated for each interrupt cycle (1 ms in the present embodiment). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the variation time of the decorative symbol, and a timer for managing the generation timing of the advance effect. The time schedule in the fluctuation effect pattern is managed by the effect timer, and time management such as the drive timing of the movable object 24 and the lighting timing of the effect lamp LP is performed on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S913) and the lamp data update process (S917) in this effect timer interrupt process.

  Subsequently, a button control timer update process is executed (S915). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the operation effective time of the effect button 15 is decremented and updated every interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation valid time is the time when the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid.

  Subsequently, task control counter update processing is executed (S916). In this task control counter updating process, the value ("0" to "15") of the task counter is updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is “0” to “14”, the value is incremented by one, and if the value of the task counter is “15”, the value is returned to “0”. That is, this task counter can take a cyclic cycle of 16 ms. Then, various tasks (task processing) are allocated corresponding to the value of the task counter updated this time, and the lamp control task (the lamp data update process in S917) and the runaway monitoring according to the value of the task counter. Each process such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring process of S9189) and an error management task (error management timer update process of S919) is executed. In this example, one of the task counter values (“0” to “15”) is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values at intervals of 8 ms) are for runaway monitoring. It is assigned to a task, and one other value is assigned to an error management task (an explanation of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the cycle period of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to match the minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and realizes synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect.

  Subsequently, lamp data update processing is executed (S917). In the lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined time is read out and set from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S621) or the like. The lamp data set in this process is data representing lighting control for 16 ms which is the minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamp LP. When lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. This lamp data output processing is configured as serial communication interrupt processing, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts lamp data of the transmission buffer in units of one byte, and outputs the lamp data to the lamp connection board 91 bit by bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, whereby all ramp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in the lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every one frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection substrate 91 by serial transfer.

  Subsequently, the image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (S918). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and the image control board 300 is not continuously changed for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames). It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 is running away, and the effect control board 200 transmits a reset signal to the image control board 300. Thereby, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process in response to the occurrence of the reset state of the sub-sub CPU 301. The toggle signal is a signal of a waveform in which H level / L level is alternately repeated every one frame time.

  Next, an error management timer process is executed (S919). In this error management timer process, the value of the error presentation timer for managing the error presentation time set in the above-mentioned error presentation management process (S616) is subtracted and updated. Then, after making all the interrupts permitted, and restoring the contents of the saved register, the effect control timer interrupt processing is ended, and the processing returns to the original processing before the occurrence of the interruption.

<< Interrupt processing of image control command transmission >>
Next, transmission interrupt processing of the image control command will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing transmission interrupt processing of an image control command. The transmission interrupt process of the image control command occurs at predetermined intervals (500 μs) set in advance.

  In this image control command transmission interrupt process, first, the image control command buffer of the sub main information storage unit 260 is checked (S931). Subsequently, the read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether an image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, the read pointer and the write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer coincide with each other, the image control command is not stored. If the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area pointed by the read pointer (S934). The read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit designated as the output destination (S935). As a result, an image control command is serially transmitted to the image control board 300 from the serial port. Next, the command data (command data transmitted in S935) is cleared (S936). Subsequently, the read pointer is incremented by one and updated (S937). Then, the transmission interrupt process of the image control command is ended, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

  The main effects achieved in the present embodiment are summarized as follows.

  According to the present embodiment, within the limited period (within 4 rotations) immediately after transition from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state, the fluctuation pattern selection state is set to the restriction frequency selection state, and the fluctuation pattern selection state is normally selected By relatively enhancing the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol compared to the state, even if the operation-reserving ball of the second special symbol generated during the advantageous gaming state is digested during the normal gaming state Because the variable display of the second special symbol is not unique (very long variable display, etc.), the player feels uncomfortable or uncomfortable about the game situation immediately after transitioning to the normal gaming state. It can be difficult to hold, as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, the entry probability (transition probability) to the latent probability change gaming state is the same regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, it is configured that the entry probability (transition probability) to the latent probability change gaming state may differ depending on the gaming state at the time of the big hit. While making the transition condition to the latent probability change gaming state (small hit RUSH mode) as the most advantageous gaming state for the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game different, it is until reaching the most advantageous gaming state Since variations can be given to the manner of transition of the gaming state, it is possible to create unprecedentedly complex and diverse gaming characteristics, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of gaming.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the external information signal signal from the external information terminal board 600 is triggered not by the activation of the condition device but by the activation of the bonus continuous actuation device. By outputting (big hit signal, continuous signal during running) to an external device, even in the case of an irregular event that a big hit (so-called accident) of the second special symbol occurs in this normal gaming state, In the waiting state of the big hit game until the game ball passes to the combination operation gate 91, 92 after the condition device operates, the occurrence of this big hit is only the specific player according to the display result of the external device (data display device) Therefore, it is possible to secure the fairness of the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the gaming state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main game, the symbol confirmation signal is not output when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, In addition, in the game state where the variable display of the second special symbol is the main body of the game, it is possible not to output the symbol confirmation signal triggered by the stop display of the variable display of the first special symbol. Among the variation display of the special symbol and the second special symbol, excluding the number of the variation display based on the start-up winning that occurred randomly in the gaming state currently staying, in the gaming state currently staying Since it is possible to extract only the originally intended number of effective variable displays, the operating status of the gaming machine can be properly managed by the hall computer, and the true operating status of the gaming machine can be It can be used as reference information for decisions and game of the gaming machine to select and informed to the player by the indicator, as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, during execution of the small hit RUSH mode, the variation display of the big hit of the first special symbol is executed based on the result of the judgment of the first special symbol being a big hit (so-called accident). If it is, until the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly terminated (that is, the game is switched to the fluctuation effect which indicates that the result of the determination of the first special symbol is a big hit Until the person recognizes the end of the small hit RUSH mode), it can be suggested or informed only that the small hit RUSH mode (latency probability change gaming state) continues, a notification indicating the continuation or the end of the small hit RUSH mode It is possible to prevent a notification effect that betrays the player's expectation that a habit will occur between the content and the actual game result, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. That.

<Modified Example 1 of First Embodiment>
FIG. 44 is a transition diagram of the gaming state and the effect mode in the modification of the first embodiment. In the above embodiment, within the limited period immediately after transitioning from the advantageous gaming state (time saving gaming state, latent probability changing gaming state, definite changing gaming state) to the normal gaming state, activation of the second special symbol generated during the advantageous gaming state The special mode for digesting the holding ball at high speed is set, but in this modification, the probability of executing a specific effect with high rarity is within a predetermined period immediately after transitioning from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state. The special mode set relatively higher than the other effect modes (normal mode) is set. In addition, "20 times" is set as a predetermined period in this modification as the number of times of variation display of a special symbol.

  In the present variation, the specific effect is a rare effect with a relatively low appearance rate and a relatively high expectation for a big hit. The "premium effect" is an effect in which a big hit is promised in the variable display (a high rarity effect whose big hit expectation is set to 100%). In the present variation, a specific premiere effect (referred to as a “specific premiere effect”) among a plurality of types of premiere effects is targeted as the above-mentioned specific effect. The specific premiere effect is, for example, a premiere lamp effect that notifies of a big hit by turning the frame lamp 10 provided on the glass frame 5 in a rainbow color, a premiere image on the screen of the effect display device 70 (e.g. The premier notice effect etc. which notify a big hit by the appearance of a character) correspond. In addition, although the specific premiere effect in this modification is configured as a big hit finalized effect in which the big hit expectation is set to 100%, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the big hit expectation is set to less than 100%. It may be configured as a high expectation degree effect (extensive heat effect).

  The specific premiere effect may be executed even when staying in another effect mode (normal mode) other than the special mode when the gaming state is the normal gaming state. However, the probability of executing a specific premiere effect is set higher when staying in the special mode than when staying in the normal mode. That is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the execution probability of a specific premiere effect is set to be different according to the effect mode during stay. The reason for setting such a special mode is, for example, when the advantageous gaming state having a high degree of advantage for the player, such as the latent probability change gaming state, is ended and the normal gaming state having a low degree of advantage for the player is dropped. Also, by transitioning to the special mode in which the execution probability of the highly rare premier rendering is improved, the rendering of the occurrence of the premier rendering that can be seen only rarely during the period of staying in this special mode It is because a privilege can be provided and the monotony of a game production can be eliminated and the sustainability of a game can be improved. In this modification, a predetermined pre-reading effect is provided as the pre-reading effect set to be executable when staying in the special mode. The predetermined read-ahead effect is the possibility of occurrence of a big hit or high expectation degree effect over one or more times of symbol variation display before the operation-retention ball (trigger-hold) which has been the object of the pre-selection lottery is digested It is an effect to suggest or notify in advance. As the predetermined prefetching effect, for example, a pending change prefetching effect corresponding to changing the display mode of the pending image and suggesting a big hit expectation degree is applicable. In this modification, as a type of the hold change look-ahead effect, a hold change look-ahead effect A and a hold change look-ahead effect B are provided. In addition, the jackpot expectation degree of this hold change look-ahead effect is set to be different depending on the final display mode of the hold image as the effect mode in principle. In this modification, six types of display modes of the reserve image, for example, "white", "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are set. The display mode of this reserved image is related to the reliability (big hit expectation) at which the result of the pass / fail judgment is a big hit, and "white" <"blue" <"green" <"red" <"gold" <" "Iridescent" is set so that the jackpot expectation degree is raised by one step each. Note that "rainbow color" is a display mode that is promised to be a big hit on the variable display performed by the trigger hold that is the target of the pre-reading lottery being digested. Here, the hold change look-ahead effect A is a look-ahead effect in which the hold change may be executed in accordance with the hold change pattern A having a relatively high degree of jackpot expectation. The hold change pattern A is an effect pattern in which the final display mode of the trigger hold (hold image) to be subjected to the pre-reading lottery changes to a display mode (for example, red) having a relatively high hit probability. On the other hand, the pending change look-ahead effect B is a prefetching effect in which the pending change may be executed according to the pending change pattern B having a relatively low degree of jackpot expectation. The hold change pattern B is an effect pattern in which the final display mode of the trigger hold (hold image) subject to the pre-reading lottery changes to a display mode (for example, blue) having a relatively low degree of big hit expectation. In this modification, the specification in the variable display in which the trigger hold that is the target of the prefetch lottery is digested is more effective when hold change look-ahead effect A is executed than when hold change look-ahead effect B is executed. It is configured to be highly likely to appear in the premiere production. At this time, although a specific effect may be performed in a variable display (called “trigger variable display”) performed by the trigger hold being digested, it is performed prior to a variable display performed by the trigger hold being digested. In the variable display performed (referred to as "pre-trigger variable display"), no specific effect is performed. With regard to the pending change look-ahead effect B, with the background effect corresponding to the special mode, the pending change look-ahead effect B is more easily executed than the background effect corresponding to the normal mode set after the end of the special mode (execution Frequency is relatively high). In addition, for a button effect (a button image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 15 is displayed, and the effect of switching the button image to another advance effect when the player actually operates the effect button 15) The trigger fluctuation display is easier to be executed than the pre-variation display (execution frequency is relatively high). For example, the button effect has a button effect A in which a blue button image is displayed and a button effect B in which a red button image is displayed, and the button effect B is more likely to have a big hit than the button effect A Is relatively high (when button effect B appears, the effect when the effect button 15 is operated is higher than the probability of hitting the button effect A than when the effect button 15 is operated. Advance production is likely to occur). At this time, a button effect is produced at a predetermined timing during execution of the trigger fluctuation display (for example, at a timing 50 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (timing during SP reach) in the trigger fluctuation display serving as a fluctuation display of 60 seconds) It is preferable that either one of A and button effect B can appear. As a modification thereof, both of the button effect A and the button effect B may appear as long as the trigger change display is being executed (for example, in the trigger change display which becomes the change display of 60 seconds, the change start) The button effect A is executed at the timing 20 seconds after (the timing before the SP reach), and the button effect B is executed at the timing 50 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (the timing during the SP reach). On the other hand, when the button effect appears during execution of the pre-trigger variation display, the button effect A is more likely to appear than the button effect B. Further, when the specific effect (premium effect) appears during the execution of the trigger change display, the button effect B is more likely to appear than when the specific effect (premium effect) does not appear during the execution of the trigger change display.

  FIG. 45 is a schematic view showing an effect mode table in the present modification. In the effect mode table, in accordance with each effect mode, the upper limit number of the effect mode, the counting target of the remaining number (special symbol type), and the timing of the remaining number display are defined.

  In this modification, a presentation mode counter is provided to count the number of times of display of variation of the special symbol executed while staying in each presentation mode. That is, based on the count value counted by the effect mode counter, the number of execution times of the effect mode (the number of remaining times until the effect mode ends) is controlled. In this effect mode counter, a value corresponding to the fluctuation display number of the special symbol (referred to as the “upper limit number of times”) is set as an initial value as a period during which the transition mode can stay in the effect mode. It is updated (subtracted) each time it is executed. That is, when the effect mode is shifted to a predetermined effect mode and the upper limit number of times during which the predetermined effect mode can stay is set in the effect mode counter, the variation display of the special symbol is executed once. The count value is decremented by one each time the variable display of the special symbol is started. Then, when the count value of the effect mode counter reaches "0", the predetermined effect mode is triggered to end (other effect modes are started from the next variable display). In the present modification, the upper limit number assigned to the special mode is "20 times", the upper limit number assigned to the time saving mode is "70 times", the upper limit number assigned to the latent mode is "100 times", The upper limit number assigned to is “100 times”. In addition, in the normal mode, there is no upper limit to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol.

  In the present modification, when the effect mode currently being stayed is the special mode, the effect mode counter only counts the number of times of the variable display of the first special symbol as the number of change display of the special symbol executed while staying in the effect mode. Target for counting. That is, when the effect mode is the special mode, the count value of the effect mode counter is intended only for the number of times of the variable display of the first special symbol serving as the main player of the game in this special effect mode (normal gaming state). The number of fluctuation display of the symbol is not considered. Therefore, the upper limit number of times "20 times" assigned to the special mode means that the variable display number of the first special symbol reaches 20 times. Therefore, since the variation display count of the second special symbol is not a target of counting, the remaining count of the special mode is not updated (subtracted) no matter how many times the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Therefore, in this special mode, the user may stay for a period exceeding 20 times (upper limit number of times) as a combined value of the number of times of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. As described above, the actual number of stays in the special mode is a variable period that fluctuates according to the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol, but this is a gaming state in which the normal gaming state has no upper limit as the number of times of variation display of special symbols. Is acceptable based on the fact that In addition, when the production mode is the normal mode, the next big hit does not occur, and the number of fluctuation display of the first special symbol reaches 20 times (when the count value of the production mode counter reaches the upper limit number of times) ) Will shift to the normal mode.

  On the other hand, when the effect mode currently in stay is the latent mode, the probability change mode, or the time saving mode, the effect mode counter is the first special symbol of the first special symbol as the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol executed while staying in the effect mode. The number of fluctuation display times and the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol are counted (the total number of the number of fluctuation displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is counted). That is, when the effect mode currently staying is the latency mode or the like (latency mode, probability variation mode, time reduction mode), the count value of the presentation mode count is the second special feature of the game in this latency mode or the like Not only the number of times of variation display of symbols, but also the number of times of variation display of the first special symbol is considered. That is, the number of stays in the latent recognition mode, etc. is the number of times that the probability variation function of the special symbol operates (prescribed ST number of times = 100 times) or the number of times the variation time shortening function of special symbols operates (number of specific times = 70 times) It corresponds to the fact that the total value of the number of fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuation display of the second special symbol is the object.

  In this modified example, even when staying in any of the effect modes (except the normal mode), the variation of the special symbol on the screen of the effect display device 70 until the effect mode in the current stay ends. It is possible to display the remaining number of times of display (the count value of the effect mode counter described above). The remaining number display of the effect mode is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol (variation display of the decoration symbol) is performed once based on the count value of the effect mode counter.

  The remaining number display of the effect mode is executed at different timings according to the type of the effect mode currently staying. Specifically, when the effect mode is the special mode, the remaining number display is performed from the variable display of the first rotation immediately after the transition to the effect mode. On the other hand, when the rendering mode is the latent probability mode, the probability variation mode, or the time saving mode, the fluctuation display after the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of times (20 rotations) is counted immediately after the transition to the rendering mode The remaining number of times display is performed from the variable display of.

  Here, FIG. 46 is a schematic view showing an example of the effect of the remaining number display of the effect mode. (A1) to (A3) in the figure are examples of effects when the effect mode currently in stay is the special mode. Further, (B1) to (B4) in the figure are examples of effects when the effect mode currently being stayed is the latent mode. Although not shown, even when the currently staying effect mode is the time saving mode or the probability variation mode, basically, an effect example similar to that of the latent mode is obtained.

  When the effect mode currently being stayed is the special mode, as shown in (A1) to (A3) in the figure, from the first rotation variation display of this special mode to the 20th rotation variation display ending The remaining number of times will be displayed during (between the start and end of the special mode). That is, while the special mode is being executed, the remaining number of the special mode is always displayed.

  On the other hand, when the effect mode currently staying is the latent mode, the remaining number of latent mode is displayed until a predetermined number of variable displays immediately after the transition to the latent mode (variation display at the 20th rotation) The remaining number of latent confirmation modes is displayed from the time of the variable display (the variable display of the 21st rotation) after the predetermined number of variable displays are finished to the end of the latent mode. That is, the display of the remaining number of times is started in the latent confirmation mode after the predetermined number of times of the variable display has ended. Therefore, in the variable display of the predetermined number of times after the transition to the latency mode or the like, the remaining frequency of the latency mode is not displayed on the screen, and the player is kept secret. The reason is that, originally, during the execution of the latent mode, it is a game characteristic that mainly performs the variable display of the second special symbol, but the first hit occurs in the normal mode, and the latent mode is generated from this normal mode In case of transition to the definite mode (when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the latent probability change gaming state), in the several revolutions immediately after the transition to the latent mode, the operation suspension of the first special symbol generated in the normal mode It is very likely that the variable display of the first special symbol will be executed by digesting the ball (the operation-retaining ball of the first special symbol carried over from the normal mode to the latent mode), and this first special symbol If the number of remaining times in the latent mode is reduced beyond the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the variable display being executed, the number of remaining times against the player's intention is displayed, and the player is Give a sense of loss or discomfort Not sleep. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining number of the latency mode is not notified immediately after the latency mode is started, and the variation display of the predetermined number of times (20 times) is completed in the latency mode. It is configured to notify the remaining number of times in the latent confirmation mode.

  In this modification, “20 times” is set as an example of the predetermined number of times, but the number of times of variation display corresponding to the maximum value (four) of the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol It is preferable to set four or more times. However, in this embodiment, the specification of the parallel machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed simultaneously in parallel is adopted, and during the execution of the latent mode, the first The first special symbol is displayed because the second special symbol fluctuation display (short time fluctuation display) may be performed many times while the fluctuation display of the special symbol (long-time fluctuation display) is being performed. In order to ensure the concealment period (predetermined number of times) until all the action-retention balls are digested, the relationship between the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is considered (the second It is preferable to determine the above-mentioned predetermined number of times in consideration of the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol which can be executed until all the operation retaining balls of the special symbol are digested. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 46, the remaining number display is displayed small at the upper right of the screen (this is referred to as a normal display), but triggered by the remaining number becoming a prescribed number. The remaining number display other than the normal display may be performed (the remaining number may be notified in a different manner). As a specific example, for example, when the number of remaining times becomes "10 times", a special display of "remaining 10 times" is added to the normal display at the center of the screen (in a larger display mode than the display at the upper right) It may be displayed simultaneously. After that, until the remaining number is digested, not only the normal display but also the special display is displayed simultaneously for each change, such as "9 remaining", "8 remaining", ..., "0 remaining", etc. May be In addition, in the current gaming state, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, triggering the event that the special symbol of the person who does not become the main player of the game is stopped changing and there is no operation reserved ball of that special symbol Alternatively, the number of remaining times may be displayed on the screen. That is, in this modification, the first remaining number of times of the short time gaming state (low probability low base state), the latent probability variation game state (high probability low base state), and the probability variation gaming state (high probability high base state) It is preferable to display the remaining number on the condition that the special symbol has stopped fluctuating and there is no operation reserved ball of the first special symbol.

  As described above, according to this modification, when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state is ended in the variable symbol display of the predetermined number of times counted from immediately after entering the gaming state. By configuring so as not to notify the remaining number of times until, originally during the advantageous game state where the variable display of the second special symbol will be the main player of the game, the first special symbol that occurred during the normal gaming state Information that is disadvantageous to the player that the variable display of the first special symbol is performed by the operation holding ball being digested during the advantageous gaming state, and the remaining number of times until the advantageous gaming state is ended is reduced. Because the player is not disclosed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a sense of discomfort or disbelief with respect to the progress processing of the game and the notification effect thereof, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

<Modification 2 of First Embodiment>
In this modification, as an external information signal output from the external information terminal board 600, a predetermined external information signal indicating transition from the probability variation gaming state to the latent probability variation gaming state is provided. In this modification, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, and it is elected to a specific big hit predetermined as the big hit type, counting from immediately after the end of the big hit game, the first special The probability variation gaming state (high probability high base state) is set until the total of the variable display numbers of the symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (100 times). Then, when the next big hit does not occur until the sum of the first special symbol and the second special symbol variation display count reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times), the predetermined number of variation display ends, It shifts to the latent probability change gaming state from the next variable display (101st variable display). At this time, the predetermined external information signal is turned on during the period from the end of the predetermined number of variable display in the probability variation gaming state or the start of the first variable display in the latent probability variation gaming state until the termination of the latent probability variation gaming state Ru.

<Modification 3 of the First Embodiment>
In this modification, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of one of the special symbols is the big hit variation display, and the variation display of the other special symbol is the variation display of the small hit, on the other hand Under the situation where the big hit variation indication of the special symbol and the small hit variation indication of the other special symbol are being executed in parallel, before the big hit variation display of one of the special symbols is finished, the small of the other special symbol When the hit variation display ends, the small hit variation display of the other special symbol ends or the small hit game is executed, and the big hit variation display of one of the special symbols is forced out of the change display End. That is, for one of the special symbols, even when the result of the judgment of success or failure is a big hit, it is replaced with a shift when the fluctuation display is stopped. In addition, it is preferable that the big hit fluctuation display of one of the above special symbols is a fluctuation display (a fluctuation display which becomes an execution trigger of a predetermined big hit game) triggered by falling under a predetermined big hit among a plurality of big hit types. It is. Therefore, if it is a big hit other than predetermined big hit among a plurality of big hit types, it is from the end of the small hit fluctuation display of the other special symbol until the end of the small hit game, as in the above embodiment. The big hit change indication of the special symbol of is being interrupted (the measurement of the change time is interrupted).

<Modification 4 of First Embodiment>
In this modification, the variation effect of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation effect of the decoration symbol (second decoration symbol) corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol Is displayed in parallel on the screen of the effect display device 70, and the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in synchronization or interlocking with the variation display of the first special symbol, and is synchronized or variable with the variation display of the second special symbol. The second decoration pattern is displayed in a variable manner in an interlocked manner. At this time, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation display, and the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit variation display or a release variation display, a small hit variation display or a removal variation of the first special symbol In a situation where the display and the big hit variation indication of the second special symbol are being executed in parallel, before the small hit variation indication or the out-of-date variation indication of the first special symbol is finished, the big hit variation indication of the second special symbol When is finished, even before the measurement time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol reaches the preset specified fluctuation time (the fluctuation time according to the design value), the big hit fluctuation display of the second special symbol At the end of the, in conjunction with or synchronized with it, the small hitting variation display or the out-of-range variation display of the first special symbol will be forcibly ended as the out-of-range variation display. Therefore, on the screen, "big hit symbol combination" is stopped and displayed as the stopped symbol combination of the second decorative symbol, and "offed symbol combination" is stopped and displayed as the stopped symbol combination of the first decorative symbol. At this time, the stop symbol combination of the second special symbol is displayed in stop according to the big hit symbol combination according to the display mode of the stop symbol combination of the first decorative symbol (disappeared symbol combination) after the end of the big hit game , The latent probability variation gaming state (small hit RUSH mode) is configured to differ in the degree of expectation to rush. Specifically, in the case of an out pattern combination A (for example, a sequence such as “1 · 2 · 3”) as the stop pattern combination of the first decorative pattern, the rush expectation to the latent probability change gaming state is highly expected In the case where it is set to a degree, and it is an off symbol combination B (for example, loose eyes such as “1 · 3 · 8”), the rush expectation to the latent probability change gaming state is set to a low expectation. In addition, when the off symbol combination A is stopped and displayed, the specification may be such that the transition to the latent probability variation gaming state is definitive.

  In the present variation, when the variation display of the special symbol of the first special symbol is a big hit variation display, and the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit variation display, with the big hit variation display of the first special symbol Under circumstances where the small hit variation display of the second special symbol is being executed in parallel, when the small hit variation display of the second special symbol is finished before the variation display of the first special symbol is finished, The big hit variation indication of the first special symbol will be interrupted between the end of the small hit variation indication of the second special symbol and the end of the small hit game, but the big hit variation of the first special symbol While the display is being interrupted, a predetermined image (for example, a message "during suspended movement") is displayed, and the stop symbol combination of the first special symbol is displayed according to the display mode (for example, display color) of this predetermined image. Stop table with big hit symbol combination After completion of the jackpot gaming executed by the fact that the may be configured to expectation to rush into latent probability variation gaming state (Koatari RUSH mode) is different.

<Modification 5 of First Embodiment>
In this modification, when the condition device is activated in response to the stop display of the variation display of the special symbol with the big hit symbol, the player is instructed to pass the gaming ball to the combination operation gates 91 and 92. The combination operation gate passing instruction effect is performed. After the variation display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol (after the condition device is activated), the game ball which has passed to the combination operation gates 91 and 92 is a combination operation gate It is executed until it is detected by the switches 911 and 921 (until the character continuous actuation device starts to operate). For example, a message indicating that the game ball should be aimed at the game operating gates 91 and 92, such as "Please aim at the game operating gate", is displayed on the screen as an instruction game for passing the game operating gate. Do. Further, in the combination operation gate passing instruction effect, in accordance with the screen display, the voice corresponding to the contents of the screen display is simultaneously output from the speaker 11. Therefore, in the combination operation gate passing instruction effect, the player is urged to be alerted from both the image display and the sound.

  At this time, when the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state When the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped by the big hit symbol when it is), the effect mode (screen display, voice) of the combination operation gate passing instruction effect may be configured to be different. That is, the effect mode of the combination operation gate passing instruction effect executed with the occurrence of the first hit, and the presentation aspect of the combination operation gate passage instruction effect executed with the so-called accident occurrence. Are preferably different.

  Also, when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a big hit symbol when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state) and the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state (high probability high base state) When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped by the big hit symbol when it is, the effect mode (screen display, sound) of the combination operation gate passing instruction effect may be configured to be different. In other words, the so-called production mode of the combination operation gate passing instruction effect performed with the occurrence of a so-called accident hit, and the production of the combination operation gate passing instruction effect performed with the generation of the jackpot of the big hit It is preferable that the aspect be different.

<Modification 6 of the First Embodiment>
In this modification, the second special symbol has a "big hit" as the big hit type, and the opening pattern of the big winning opening 54 in the big hitting game is substantially the same as or similar to the opening pattern of the big winning opening 54 in the small hitting game It shall be. For example, assuming that the opening pattern of the large winning opening 54 in the small hit game is "about 1.8 seconds of opening × 1 time", the opening pattern of the large winning opening 54 in each round game of the big hit game is "about 1. Open 8 seconds × 1 time. Therefore, for example, in the big hit game executed upon being won by the sudden round of N round, the open pattern "open about 1.8 seconds × 1 time" is performed over N rounds (N times) Become. Thereby, a game with an open time and an open pattern similar in appearance is developed between the big hit game and the small hit game, and the big hit game when the big hit is generated as a small hit game multiple times (N times) It can look like a pseudo.

<Modification 7 of First Embodiment>
In this modified example, unlike the gaming machine of the above embodiment (number-turn probability changing machine), the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is configured as a normal probability changing machine continuing from the end of the big hit game until the next big hit occurs. It is done. Therefore, (1) When the gaming state after the end of the big hit game shifts to the probability variation gaming state (high probability high base state), the probability fluctuation number, the fluctuation time shortening number and the easy entry state number as "「 times (65535 times ) Is set, and (2) when the game state after the big hit game end shifts to latent probability change game state (high probability low base state), “) times (65535 times)” as probability fluctuation number and fluctuation time shortening number If the number of easy-to-enter ball states is set to "0," (3) the game state after the end of the big-hit game shifts to a short-time gaming state (low probability high base state) "70 times" is set as the number of states, "0" is set as the number of probability fluctuations, and (4) when the gaming state after the end of the big hit game shifts to the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), the number of probability fluctuations , Strange "0 times" is set as a time shorter times and ball entrance easily state number. Therefore, with regard to transition control of the gaming state, basically the above-mentioned first, except that the number of continuations of the probability variation gaming state and the latent probability variation gaming state is changed from "100 times" to "∞ times (65535 times)". It is the same as that of one embodiment.

Second Embodiment
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment basically has the same configuration as that of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained. That is, in the following description, it is possible to apply the same configuration as that of the first embodiment except in a special case.

  FIG. 47 is a front view of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment. On the front surface of the game board 20, a substantially circular game area PA in which the outer rails 41 and the inner rails 42 are fixed in an arc shape and on which game balls can be rolled is defined. A center decoration 21 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the central opening of the center decoration 21. The game area PA is a left area PA1 which is an area on the left side of the center decoration 21 (a board surface area corresponding to a left strike) with respect to the center decoration 21 substantially at the center, and an area on the right side of the center decoration 21 (right And the right side area PA2 which is the board surface area corresponding to An introduction passage 44 connecting the left area PA1 and the right area PA2 is provided in the upper part of the center decoration 21 so that the right-handed game ball can pass through the introduction passage 44 to reach the right area PA2. ing.

  In the lower area of the center decoration 21, the left first starting opening 51A is disposed. The left first starting opening 51A is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and is provided with a first starting opening switch 511A for detecting entry of a game ball. The left first starting opening 51A is a normally open winning opening with an upward opening, and a game ball (a left-handed game ball) flowing mainly down the left area PA1 can enter the ball. Entry of the game ball into the left first start opening 51A is a trigger for the first special symbol lottery.

  The right first starting opening 51B is disposed in the right area (right area PA2) of the center decoration 21. The right first starting opening 51B is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, similarly to the above-described left first starting opening 51A, and is a first starting for detecting entry of the gaming ball. A mouth switch 511B is provided. The first right starting opening 51B is a normally open winning opening with an upward opening, and a gaming ball (right-handed gaming ball) flowing down mainly on the right side area PA2 can enter. Entry of the game ball into the right first start opening 51B is a trigger for the first special symbol lottery.

  Here, above the right side area PA2, a right side flow path 45 is formed where the gaming balls having passed through the communication passage 44 flow down. The right channel 45 is defined between the outer rail 41 and the right wall of the center decoration 21 and is narrower than twice the diameter of the gaming ball and formed to a channel width through which the gaming ball can pass only in a single row There is. The right channel 45 communicates with the first branch channel 46 and the second branch channel 47. The first branch flow channel 46 is formed along the outer edge of the right wall portion of the center decoration 21, and the second branch flow channel 47 is formed along the outer edge of the outer rail 41. Each of the first branch flow channel 46 and the second branch flow channel 47 is formed in a flow channel width where the game ball can flow down, and the gaming ball having passed through the right flow channel 45 is the first branch flow channel 46 or It flows into the second branch channel 47. Between the first branch flow channel 46 and the second branch flow channel 47, the gaming ball which has flowed down the right flow channel 45 is selectively selected to any one of the first branch flow channel 46 and the second branch flow channel 47. A sorting member 48 is provided for sorting.

  The distribution member 48 is a closed position in which the tip end portion (upper end portion) is directed substantially vertically upward to close the first branch flow path 46 centering on a spindle extending substantially orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 20; The tip end portion (upper end portion) is pivotably attached between an open position in which the first branch flow channel 46 is opened by directing the upper right direction obliquely upward. The distributing member 48 is connected to a solenoid as a driving means (not shown), and the solenoid is controlled to be energized / deenergized to extend / retract the plunger so that the surface substantially parallel to the board of the game board 20 Swing control is performed between the closed position and the open position. The solenoid is electrically connected to the main control board 100, and is driven and controlled based on a drive signal output from the main control board 100. The distributing member 48 is driven to the open position or the closed position at predetermined time intervals according to a predetermined drive pattern set in advance. Specifically, the distributing member 48 alternately repeats opening for 0.1 seconds and closing for 1.9 seconds (opening time: closing time = 1: 19). Therefore, about 5% (1/20) of the gaming balls flowing down the right area PA2 flow down the first branch flow channel 46, and about 95% (19/20) of the gaming balls are second branching The flow channel 47 is designed to flow down. In addition, the distribution ratio of the gaming ball can be set arbitrarily, and for example, the first branch flow channel 46 and the first branch channel 46 can be selected at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 1: 1, 1: 2, 2: 1) It is good also as what employ | adopts the structure which can be selectively distributed to the 2-branch flow path 47. In addition, the distribution member 48 is not electrically driven, and swings between the open position and the closed position by the action of the game ball's own weight and ball pressure, and the game ball is made into the first branch flow path It may be distributed to the 46 or the second branch flow channel 47.

  The first right starting opening 51B is provided downstream of the first branch passage 46, and the gaming ball flowing down the first branched passage 46 is configured to enter the first right starting opening 51B. ing. On the other hand, on the downstream side of the second branch flow channel 47, an operation gate 53, a special winning opening 54, and a second start opening 52 are provided.

  The actuation gate 53 is provided as a start winning hole corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an actuation gate switch 531 for detecting passage of gaming balls. In addition, passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 becomes an opportunity of the normal symbol lottery for determining whether the 2nd starting opening 52 shall be in an open state.

  The big winning opening 54 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the result of the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The special winning opening 54 is a special winning opening switch 541 for detecting entry of the game ball, a special electric jack 542 generally referred to as an attacker, and a large winning prize for opening and closing the special electric jack 542. A mouth solenoid 543 is provided. The special electric character 542 is variable between an open state where the game ball can enter or is easy to enter and a closed state where the game ball can not enter or difficult to enter the big winning opening 54. In the special game (big hit game, small hit game), when firing the game ball, hitting the right area PA2 so-called right hit makes it easy to enter the big winning opening 54 There is.

  The special electric symbol 542 includes a movable member 544 sliding forward and backward for opening and closing the large winning opening 54. The movable member 544 is a closed position (protrusion position) where the big winning opening 54 is closed to make it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball, and the big winning opening 54 is made possible to facilitate or easy to enter the gaming ball. It is slidable in the front-rear direction (the direction orthogonal to the board surface) between the opening position (retraction position) to be moved. The upper surface of the movable member 544 has a passage width of about one or more game balls in the front-rear direction, and is formed to incline downward from the right side to the left side in front view. Therefore, when the movable member 544 is in the closed position (when the big winning opening 54 is in the closed state), the gaming ball can flow down the upper surface of the movable member 544 as a guiding path, and the guiding path is left to right Flow down to the left end of the special motorized component 542 (flow toward the second start port 52).

  The second starting port 52 is disposed at the lower left of the special electric symbol 542, and the special electric symbol 542 is in the closed position (when the big winning opening 54 is in the closed state), special The game ball which has passed the upper surface of the electric part 542 will flow down toward the second starting opening 52, and if the second starting opening 52 is in the open state, then the gaming ball is in the second starting opening 52. It is easy to hit the ball. On the other hand, when the movable member 544 is in the open position (when the second start opening 52 is in the open state), it is extremely easy for the game ball flowing down the second flow passage to enter the big winning opening 54 It has become. In the present embodiment, the game balls flowing down the second flow-down channel have a board design (gauge design) that flows toward the large winning opening 54 (normal electric character 522) with extremely high probability, and the large winning opening When 54 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is guided to the upper surface of the movable member 544 and flows down toward the second starting opening 52, while when the special winning opening 54 is in the open state, the gaming ball is the special winning opening It is configured so as not to reach the second starting opening 52 by entering the ball 54.

  The second starting opening 52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and is provided with a second starting opening switch 521 for detecting entry of the game ball. The second starting opening 51 is disposed in the right area PA2 which is a board area corresponding to a right hit, and a game ball (right hit game ball) flowing down the right area PA2 can enter mainly. Entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 52 triggers the second special symbol lottery. The second start port 52 is provided with a normal motorized component 522 generally referred to as a power chow and a common motorized component solenoid 523 for driving the common motorized component 522 to open and close. The ordinary electric accessory 522 changes the game ball into an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter or into the second starting opening 52. In other words, the ordinary electric role 522 has a structure in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second starting opening 52 unless it is displaced to the open state, and is opened at a predetermined opportunity (a chance to win the normal symbol lottery). When it becomes it becomes easy to enter the game ball.

  In the second embodiment configured as described above, from the same effect as the first embodiment described above, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the left area PA1 is the main area of the game, and the gaming state is the advantageous game In the case of the state (time saving gaming state, latent probability variation gaming state, probability variation gaming state), the right area PA2 is the main area of the game. At this time, two starting openings 51B and 52 (first right starting opening 51B and second starting opening 52) are disposed in the right side area PA, and when the game ball is launched to aim at the right side area PA2, The game ball is selectively distributed to the flow-down path toward the first right start opening 51 B and the flow-down path toward the second start opening 52 according to the operating position (open position, closed position) of the distribution member 48 . Therefore, when the gaming state is the advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state, latent probability changing gaming state, probability changing gaming state), the game ball is made to enter the first starting opening 51B or the second starting opening 52 by right-handling, It becomes the game characteristic which concurrently executes in parallel the parallel determination of the first special symbol's pass / fail determination (the first special symbol's variable display) and the second special symbol's pass / fail determination (the second special symbol's variable display). That is, when the gaming state is the advantageous gaming state, the variation display of the other special symbol is easily performed during the variation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (The variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are easily performed in parallel).

  In addition, as a modification, when it is a predetermined advantageous gaming state (for example, latent probability variation gaming state) among a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states, the sorting member 48 is driven to make the gaming ball right first While selectively letting flow to the start opening 51B side or the second start opening 52 side, in the other advantageous gaming state (for example, time saving gaming state, probability variation gaming state), the distribution member 48 is not driven, The gaming ball may be configured to always flow down to the second starting opening 52 side.

  In the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the second embodiment of this configuration, various game effects are controlled by the effect control board 200 and executed in accordance with the progress of the game and the like. Below, among various game effects, the main effect contents in the latent mode (small hit RUSH mode) will be described.

<Invincible zone production>
An invincible zone effect in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a time chart of invincible zone effects. The invincible zone effect is a state that is advantageous for the player by switching to a special background image different from the usual during the big hit change display performed triggered by the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol being a big hit It is an effect that suggests or informs that it is an invincible zone).

  First, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, as described above, the latent probability selecting state is set as the variation pattern selection state corresponding to the latent probability changing gaming state. When the variation pattern selection state is set to the latent probability selection state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected with reference to the variation pattern table 4 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the result of the determination of success or failure of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation time of the special symbol is set to a very long time (10 minutes) as the variation pattern of the first special symbol The pattern PA4-4 is selected. At this time, while the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is being performed, the yes or no judgment of the second special symbol will be no jackpot state of the jackpot, and the jackpot is derived as a result of the judgment of the second special symbol. There will be only small hits or departures. Here, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to a very short time (0.5 seconds) as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. When the variation pattern PHA4-1 is selected and the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is disapproval, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol is very short (1 second The fluctuation pattern PH4-1 set in (1) is selected. Therefore, while the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is being performed, the variation display of the second special symbol is digested at high speed, and it is possible to perform about hundreds of pass / fail determinations (lottery) about the second special symbol It becomes.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, the winning probability of the big hit is set to the high probability (about 1/80), and the above-mentioned several hundred times of variable display is usually performed It is very likely that the next big hit will occur during that time (therefore the chance of the small hit RUSH mode ending is very high). In addition, "the end of the small hit RUSH mode" includes that the small hit RUSH mode (hidden probability change gaming state) is ended once. In other words, when winning a big hit that triggers transition to the latent probability variation gaming state, a big hit game is started, so once a big hit gaming state (normal gaming state / low probability low base state) is set, Since after the end of the big hit game will enter the latent probability change gaming state again, it can be said that in that case the latent probability change gaming state will be "temporarily" ended. However, during the execution of the first special symbol big hit variation display, it will be no lottery condition of the big hit in the determination of the second special symbol, and the big hit of the second special symbol will not be derived (small hit RUSH mode Because the game does not end), in the above-mentioned hundreds of variable display, it is possible for the player to make a special bonus that it is possible to frequently make a small hit frequently (it is possible to increase the number of small hit games frequently). It is possible to apply to

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the effect mode currently staying is the latent mode, the big hit fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed triggered by the result of the judgment of the first special symbol being a big hit During the execution of the variable display, an invincible zone effect that suggests or informs that the latent mode (small hit RUSH mode) is in an invincible state (a favorable state for the player) that does not end halfway It is configured to be executable.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the invincible zone effect is executed from the start of the big hit variation display of the first special symbol to the end of the big hit variation display. That is, the invincible zone effect is to be executed in a period in which the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is controlled to the big hit no lottery state. During execution of the invincible zone effect, only a small hit or release is derived as a result of the determination of the second special symbol, and only a small hit variation display or a variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Ru.

  FIG. 49 is a schematic view showing a basic screen of invincible zone effect rendering. When the invincible zone effect is started, the background image displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70 is switched from the background image dedicated to the latency mode to the background image dedicated to the invincible zone. During execution of this invincible zone effect, a band image 721 in which the characters "ZONE" are displayed at the left and right ends of the screen is displayed as the background display (the background image serving as the back display of the decorative symbol). As a result, the player is indicated or informed that the current game state has entered the unbeatable zone. When the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is finished, the invincible zone effect is finished (the latent mode is finished), and the game is shifted to the big hit game.

  In addition, during execution of the special zone effect, as described above, the background image is switched to a special background image, and accordingly, the display effect of the change effect (reach effect etc.) of the decorative symbol, the notice effect, and the advance notice effect are also special It may be a special display mode dedicated to zone effects.

<Remaining fluctuation time notification effect>
Next, the remaining fluctuation time informing effect in the second embodiment will be described. The remaining fluctuation time informing effect during the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol is triggered when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol becomes a big hit when the gaming state is the latent probability change gaming state It is an effect of informing the remaining time until the big hit fluctuation display ends (referred to as "remaining fluctuation time"). On the remaining time display portion 722 (see FIG. 49) provided on the screen of the effect display device 70, the remaining fluctuation time until the end of the big hit fluctuation display of the first special symbol is displayed in the form of a countdown. In addition, during the big hit fluctuation indication of this 1st special symbol, it becomes the no lottery condition of the big hit where it was forbidden to derive the big hit as a result of the decision of the 2nd special symbol, the period when the above invincible zone effect is executed It becomes. Therefore, it can be said that this remaining fluctuation time informs the remaining time until the end of the invincible zone.

  The remaining fluctuation time is managed based on the count value of the presentation time timer provided in the presentation control means 220 of the presentation control board 200. In this effect time timer, a prescribed fluctuation time determined in accordance with the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is set as an initial value. That is, this prescribed fluctuation time means the fluctuation time defined in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. Therefore, when the gaming state is the latent probability variation gaming state, if the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation of the first special symbol as defined in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. The time is "10 minutes". Therefore, when the big hit fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, "10 minutes" is set as the initial value in the effect time timer. The timing value of the presentation time timer is subtracted from the time the variable display of the first special symbol is started with the lapse of that time, and when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, it becomes "0". Through. Note that the effect time timer starts counting in response to the reception of the change start command transmitted from the main control board 100.

  Here, when the small hit game is executed by the result of the judgment of the second special symbol being a small hit while the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is being performed, it is provided on the main control board 100 side The clocking process by the special symbol game timer and the clocking process by the effect time timer provided on the effect control board 200 side are different control. The special symbol game timer includes a first special symbol game timer and a second special symbol game timer. Hereinafter, time measurement processing of each timer will be described.

(Timer processing of special symbol game timer)
FIG. 50 is a time chart for illustrating the change interruption process of the special symbol. As described above, during the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the small hit game is executed triggered by the result of the judgment of the other special symbol being a small hit during the variation display of the one special symbol. When being played, the variation display of one of the special symbols is interrupted from the start of the small hit game until the end of the small hit game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50, when the small hitting game is executed triggered by the result of the judgment of the success or failure of the second special symbol being a small hit during the fluctuation display of the big hit of the first special symbol, the small Until the end of the hit game, the variation display of the jackpot of the first special symbol is interrupted. That is, while the small hit game is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted (execution time of the small hit game = interruption time of the variable display of the first special symbol). Thereby, the above-mentioned special symbol game timer provided on the main control board 100 suspends (temporarily stops) the counting of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol from the start of the small hit game to the end thereof. And when the small hit game is over, the special symbol game timer restarts the counting of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and the measurement time of the fluctuation time before resumption and the measurement time of the fluctuation time after resumption The variation display of the first special symbol is ended when the summation time reaches a preset specified variation time (variation time as designed). In the present example, "3 seconds" is set for the small hit game execution time. The execution time of the small hit game is a time obtained by adding the small hit start demonstration time, one round time, and the small hit end demonstration time.

(Timer processing of presentation time timer)
On the other hand, when the small hitting game is executed triggered by the result of the judgment of the second special symbol being a small hit during the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect time timer is the execution of the small hitting game The time (the time when the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted) is added to the clock value as the additional time, and the clocking is continued even while the small hit game is being executed. Specifically, when the small hit game of the second special symbol occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect time timer is a time of "three seconds" allocated as the execution time of the small hit game Continue timing with the added value. Thus, the small hit game execution time (3 seconds) is added to the effect time timer each time a small hit game occurs. Accordingly, also for the remaining fluctuation time displayed on the screen, a time value of “3 seconds” is additionally displayed each time a small hit game occurs, corresponding to the count value of the presentation time timer. Below, this time value addition display production of time value is also referred to as "timer addition production". Therefore, in this remaining fluctuation time informing effect, the remaining fluctuation time until the end of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol big hit is increased or decreased in effect, and the remaining fluctuation time is artificially extended by the occurrence of the timer addition effect The more you play, the more you can increase the sense of expectation of getting out balls by small hit games.

  Subsequently, a presentation example of the remaining fluctuation time notification presentation will be described. FIG. 51 is a schematic view showing an example of effects of the remaining fluctuation time notification effect. In addition, on the screen, an effect relating to the second special symbol game which is the main game in the latent mode (a change effect corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol) is displayed. Further, in the drawing, in order to facilitate understanding of the present effect example, the clocking value of the special symbol gaming timer and the clocking value of the presentation time timer are added to the right of each screen display.

  As shown in (A) in the figure, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started triggered by the result of the judgment of the first special symbol being a big hit, the time value of the presentation time timer is displayed on the screen The time according to is displayed as the remaining fluctuation time. At this time, “10 minutes 00 seconds” is displayed as the time value corresponding to the initial value of the rendering time timer in the remaining fluctuation time on the screen. The effect time timer is updated each time the effect control timer interrupt process described above is executed (every interrupt cycle thereof), but the display of the remaining fluctuation time on the screen is updated in units of one second.

  As shown in (B) in the figure, when one second has passed since the first variable symbol display was started, one second is subtracted from the initial value, and the remaining fluctuation time displayed on the screen is “9. Minutes 59 seconds updated. Thus, the remaining fluctuation time displayed in the remaining time display area 722 is "10 minutes 00 seconds" → "9 minutes 59 seconds" → "9 minutes 58 seconds" → ... → "0 with the passage of time. It will be updated one second at a time, such as "00 minutes". In (B) of the figure, the out-of-hand symbol combination ("1-5-8") is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

  As shown in (C) in the figure, when 2 seconds have passed since the first variable symbol display was started, 2 seconds are subtracted from the initial value, and the remaining fluctuation time is updated to "9:58". Be done. In the figure, the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, and after the fluctuation display of the very short time (0.5 seconds), the small hit symbol combination as a stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol (“3-3 -7 ") is displayed stopped. In addition, at the present time, the clock value of the special symbol game counter and the clock value of the effect time counter are the same.

  As shown in (D) in the figure, when 3 seconds have passed since the start of variation display of the first special symbol (in the original case, the remaining variation time on the screen is updated to "9 minutes 57 seconds" When the small hit game is started, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted until the small hit game is ended. Therefore, the special symbol game timer suspends time counting from the start of the small hit game to the end of the small hit game. On the other hand, the effect time timer does not temporarily stop clocking even during the small hit game, and continues counting as it is, as "3 seconds" which is the execution time of the small hit game is added as an additional time. Therefore, the remaining fluctuation time displayed on the screen is increased from "9 minutes 57 seconds" to "10 minutes 00 seconds", with "3 seconds" added as an execution time for the small hit game. Therefore, the counting value (remaining fluctuation time display on the screen) of the rendering time timer is increased by three seconds for the additional time, as compared with the counting value of the special symbol game timer. As a result, the variation time of the first special symbol is visually extended for three seconds. In this way, the additional time corresponding to the execution time of the small hit game is added, so that a feeling of payout commensurate with the additional time is obtained, and it becomes the effect as if the end time of the small hit RUSH mode was postponed. The player's feeling can be further enhanced.

  As shown in (E) in the figure, the remaining fluctuation time is updated to "9 minutes 57 seconds" when 6 seconds have passed since the start of the variation display of the first special symbol (when the small hitting game is over) Be done. That is, the counting time of the effect time timer is “9 minutes 57 seconds” by continuing the clocking for 3 seconds corresponding to the additional time (the execution time of the small hit game). On the other hand, as a result of interrupting the clocking from the start to the end of the small hit game, the special symbol game timer has a clock value of "9 minutes 57 seconds". Thereby, at the end of this small hit game, the time count value of the special symbol game timer and the time value of the presentation time timer match, and the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol corresponds to the actual remaining time and stage No wrinkles occur between the remaining time.

  As shown in (F) in the figure, when 7 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the remaining variation time is updated to "9 minutes 56 seconds". Thereafter, every time a small hit game is executed triggered by the result of the second special symbol's success or failure being judged as a small hit, 3 seconds are added to the remaining fluctuation time display on the screen, and this additional time ( It is possible to obtain a feeling of popping according to the extension time of the variable display). In addition, since it is possible to recognize that the latent mode will continue until the remaining fluctuation time displayed on the screen becomes "0", it is possible to eliminate having an anxiety feeling that the latent mode does not know how long it will last be able to. In addition, as a modification, the configuration may be such that the remaining fluctuation time display is first added after a plurality of small hitting games are executed during execution of the long time fluctuation display of the first special symbol. That is, instead of being added for 3 seconds each time a small hit game is executed, for example, it is not won for the lottery that the additional effect is performed until the small hit is performed 10 times, and the additional effect is performed after 10 times If the player has won the lottery, the effect may be to add 30 seconds (3 seconds × 10 times = 30 seconds) at a time.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, during the execution of the small hit RUSH mode, as the big hit variation display of the first special symbol based on the result of the judgment of the first special symbol being a big hit (per so-called accident) When the long-time fluctuation display (long fluctuation display) is executed, the restriction result that only a small hit or an outlier is derived as a result of the judgment of the second special symbol during execution of the long-time fluctuation display is used. By performing an invincible zone effect that suggests or informs that the player is in an advantageous state while this long-term variable display is being performed, the time scale of the long-term variable display while this invincible zone effect is being performed The player can endure the small hit RUSH mode sufficiently, because the player can be given a sense of security that the small hit RUSH mode does not end on the way. Can, as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, according to the second embodiment, during execution of the small hit RUSH mode, while the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the determination of the first special symbol being a big hit If the small hit game is executed based on the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol being a small hit, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game (( When the information display related to the remaining time until the end of the variable display is performed by utilizing the restriction of temporarily stopping the timing of the change time related to the variable display, the change display is interrupted By notifying the above remaining time in the form of adding a time value, it is possible for the player to fully sense the feeling of winning or the feeling of continuation of the small hit as the above remaining time increases as the small hit game occurs and the remaining time increases. It is possible to let Do effect with a payout feeling can be performed). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modified Example 1 of Second Embodiment>
In the second embodiment, when the gaming state is the latent probability variation gaming state, if the result of the determination of the success or failure of the first special symbol is a big hit, regardless of the big hit type (type of big hit symbol), always change Although the fluctuation pattern PA4-4 whose time is set to a long time (10 minutes) is selected, it is configured to execute the invincible zone effect and the timer addition effect during the big hit fluctuation display of the first special symbol The present invention is not limited to this configuration, and when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, a different variation pattern (variation time) can be selected according to the type of the big hit, and a specific variation Only when a pattern is selected, invincible zone effects and timer addition effects are executed during the big hit change display of the first special symbol (during a change display based on a specific change pattern) Sea urchin may be configured. It is preferable that this specific fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a very long time (for example, 10 minutes). On the other hand, it is preferable that the non-specific variation pattern other than that is a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to a relatively short time (for example, one minute) as compared with the particular variation pattern. is there.

  Specifically, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a big hit that is a transition trigger to a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state or a probability changing gaming state, the first special A specific variation pattern set for a very long time (10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the symbol, and invincible zone effect and timer addition effect are executed during the big hit variation display of the first special symbol . According to the configuration, if the invincible zone effect and the remaining fluctuation time informing effect are executed during the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the game is re-entered into the latent probability change gaming state (small hit RUSH mode) after the end of the jackpot game. Although it does not rush, the small hit RUSH mode does not end while the effect is being performed, so that the player can fully enjoy the small hit RUSH mode during that time.

  On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is extremely long time only if the big hit type is a big hit that becomes a transition trigger to latent probability change gaming state The specific fluctuation pattern set to (10 minutes) may be selected, and the invincible zone effect and the remaining fluctuation time informing effect may be executed during the big hit fluctuation display of the first special symbol. According to the configuration, when the invincible zone effect and the timer overdue effect are executed during the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol, the increase in the amount of balls is obtained by the frequent occurrence of the small hit game while the effect is being executed. Since it is possible to provide the player with the benefits and the benefit of re-entering the latent probability change gaming state even after the end of the big hit game, the player's ability to generate invincible zone effects and timer-based effects It is possible to further increase the sense of expectation.

Third Embodiment
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment basically has the same configuration as that of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained. That is, in the following description, it is possible to apply the same configuration as that of the first embodiment except in a special case.

  FIG. 52 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment. On the front surface of the game board 20, a substantially circular game area PA in which the outer rails 41 and the inner rails 42 are fixed in an arc shape and on which game balls can be rolled is defined. A center decoration 21 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the central opening of the center decoration 21. The game area PA is a left area PA1 which is an area on the left side of the center decoration 21 (a board surface area corresponding to a left strike) with respect to the center decoration 21 substantially at the center, and an area on the right side of the center decoration 21 (right And the right side area PA2 which is the board surface area corresponding to An introduction passage 44 connecting the left area PA1 and the right area PA2 is provided in the upper part of the center decoration 21 so that the right-handed game ball can pass through the introduction passage 44 to reach the right area PA2. ing.

  In the area under the center decoration 21, the upper first starting opening 51A is disposed. The upper first starting opening 51A is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and is provided with a first starting opening switch 511A for detecting entry of a game ball. The first upper starting opening 51A is a normally open winning opening with an upward opening, and a gaming ball (a left-handed gaming ball) which mainly flows down the left area PA1 can enter. Entry of the game ball into the upper first start opening 51A is a trigger for the first special symbol lottery.

  A lower first start port 51B is disposed below the upper first start port 51A. The lower first start opening 51B is provided as a start winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, similarly to the above-described upper first start opening 51A, and the game ball (flowing left mainly down the left area PA1 The game ball can enter the ball. Entry of the game ball into the lower first start opening 51B is a trigger for the first special symbol lottery. The lower first start opening 51B is driven to open and close the second start opening switch 511B for detecting the ball entry of the game ball, the ordinary electric jack 512 generally referred to as electric chow, and the ordinary electric jack 512 And an electric motorized product solenoid 513. The ordinary electric character 512 changes the game ball into an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter or into the first lower opening 51B. That is, the normal electric role product 512 has a structure in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the lower first starting opening 51B if it is not displaced to the open state, and a predetermined trigger described below (a trigger to win the normal symbol lottery) When it becomes an open state, the ease of entering the game ball becomes high.

  An operation gate 53 is disposed on the left side of the lower first start port 51B. The actuation gate 53 is provided as a start winning hole corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an actuation gate switch 531 for detecting passage of gaming balls. In addition, passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 becomes an opportunity of a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not the lower first starting opening 51B is to be opened.

  The second starting opening 52 is disposed in the right area (right area PA2) of the center decoration 21, and the special winning opening 54 is disposed obliquely downward to the left. The second starting opening 52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and is provided with a second starting opening switch 521 for detecting entry of the game ball. The second starting opening 52 is a normally open winning opening opened upward, and a game ball (a game ball hit to the right) flowing mainly down the right side area PA2 can enter. Entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 52 triggers the second special symbol lottery.

  The big winning opening 54 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the result of the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The special winning opening 54 is a special winning opening switch 541 for detecting entry of the game ball, a special electric jack 542 generally referred to as an attacker, and a large winning prize for opening and closing the special electric jack 542. A mouth solenoid 543 is provided. The special electric character 542 is variable between an open state where the game ball can enter or is easy to enter and a closed state where the game ball can not enter or difficult to enter the big winning opening 54. In the special game (big hit game, small hit game), when firing the game ball, hitting the right area PA2 so-called right hit makes it easy to enter the big winning opening 54 There is.

  In the third embodiment, the gaming balls flowing down the left side area PA1 can mainly enter any of the upper first starting opening 51A, the lower first starting opening 51B (the ordinary electric jack 512), and the operation gate 53. is there. On the other hand, gaming balls flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter the second starting opening 52 or the big winning opening 54 mainly.

  Subsequently, the gaming state in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, a normal gaming state, a time saving gaming state, a latent probability variation gaming state, and a probability variation gaming state are set as a plurality of types of gaming states.

  FIG. 53 is a schematic view showing a gaming state setting table in the third embodiment. In the gaming state setting table, for each jackpot type (type of symbol group), a gaming state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game is set. The big hit type (type of symbol group) of this third embodiment is the same as the big hit type (type of symbol group) of the first embodiment, and as the big hit type (type of symbol group) of the first special symbol, 10R specific big hit (symbol group A), "4R specific big hit 1 (symbol group B)", "4R specific big hit 2 (symbol group C)", "4R normal big hit (symbol group D)" As a big hit type (type of symbol group) of special symbols, "10R specific big hit (symbol group E)", "6R specific big hit 1 (symbol group F)", "4R specific big hit 1 (symbol group G)", "4R It has specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H) and "2R normal jackpot (symbol group I)". In this third embodiment, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is (A) big hit type (type of symbol group), and (B) big hit when winning It is set according to the game state of. In addition, the number of continuations of each gaming state (number of fluctuation display of special symbol) is the number of probability fluctuation (number of probability change operation) that the probability fluctuation function of special symbol operates and fluctuation time when fluctuation time shortening function of special symbol operates It is set based on the number of times of shortening (the number of times of short operation) and the number of times of easy entry into the ball (the number of times of operation of the electric support) that the electric support function is activated. In addition, the probability variation function of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Further, as the probability fluctuation number, "10,000 times" may be set, which substantially corresponds to the fluctuation display number until the next big hit occurrence.

  In the first special symbol, if you have won "10R specific big hit (symbol group A)", "4R specific big hit 1 (symbol group B)", regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit, after the end of the big hit game The latent probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state. When transitioning to the latent probability change gaming state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number “100 times”, the fluctuation time shortening number “100 times”, and the ball entry easy state number “0 times” are set. Therefore, the latent probability variation gaming state continues until the variation display count of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST count (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST count (100 times), the special When the latent probability change gaming state ends when the variable display count of the symbol reaches the prescribed ST count (100 times), transition to the normal gaming state from the next variable display of the special symbol occurs, and the next big hit occurs When the latent probability change gaming state ends, the game state transitions to the gaming state according to the type (big hit type) of the big hit symbol after the end of the big hit game.

  When "4R specific big hit 2 (design group C)" is won in the first special symbol, the probability change gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game regardless of the playing state at the time of the big hit. When transitioning to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number "100 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the easy entering state number "100 times" are set. Therefore, the probability variation gaming state continues until the variation display count of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST count (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST count (100 times), the special symbol When the probability change gaming state ends when the variable display number of times reaches the prescribed ST number (100 times), transition to the normal gaming state from the fluctuation display of the special symbol of the next time, the probability change by the next big hit occurring When the gaming state ends, the gaming state is shifted to the gaming state according to the type (big hit type) of the big hit symbol after the end of the big hit game.

  In the first special symbol, when "4R normal big hit (symbol group D)" is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit, time saving game state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game. When transitioning to the time saving game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number “0 times”, the fluctuation time shortening number “70 times”, and the easy entering state number “70 times” are set. Therefore, the time saving gaming state continues until the variation display count of the special symbol reaches the specific number (70 times) or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number (70 times), the variation of the special symbol When the time saving game state ends when the number of times of display reaches the specific number of times (70 times), transition to the normal gaming state from the fluctuation display of the special symbol of the next time, and the time saving game state is When it ends, it changes to the game state according to the kind (big hit classification) of the big hit symbol, after the end of the big hit game.

  If you win in the second special symbol "10R specific big hit (symbol group E)", "6R specific big hit (symbol group F)", "4R specific big hit 1 (symbol group G)", the gaming state at the time of the big hit elected Depending on, the game state which is set after the end of that big hit game differs. Specifically, when the gaming state at the time of the big hit is the normal gaming state, the short time gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming, When the state is the time latent probability variation gaming state, the latent probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game. In case of transition to the probability change gaming state after the end of the big hit game, probability fluctuation number "100 times", fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", easy entering game number "100 times" is set, and after the big hit game is over, it is latent When transitioning to the probability variation gaming state, the probability fluctuation number "100 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the ball entry easy state number "0 times" are set. Therefore, the probability variation gaming state continues until the variation display count of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST count (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST count (100 times), the special symbol When the probability change gaming state ends when the variable display number of times reaches the prescribed ST number (100 times), transition to the normal gaming state from the fluctuation display of the special symbol of the next time, the probability change by the next big hit occurring When the gaming state ends, the gaming state is shifted to the gaming state according to the type (big hit type) of the big hit symbol after the end of the big hit game. Similarly, the latent probability variation gaming state continues until the variation display count of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST count (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST count (100 times), and the special When the latent probability change gaming state ends when the variable display count of the symbol reaches the prescribed ST count (100 times), transition to the normal gaming state from the next variable display of the special symbol occurs, and the next big hit occurs When the latent probability change gaming state ends, the game state transitions to the gaming state according to the type (big hit type) of the big hit symbol after the end of the big hit game.

  When "4R specific big hit 2 (design group H)" is won in the second special symbol, the probability change gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game regardless of the playing state at the time of the big hit. When transitioning to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number "100 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the easy entering state number "100 times" are set. Therefore, the probability variation gaming state continues until the variation display count of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST count (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST count (100 times), the special symbol When the probability change gaming state ends when the variable display number of times reaches the prescribed ST number (100 times), transition to the normal gaming state from the fluctuation display of the special symbol of the next time, the probability change by the next big hit occurring When the gaming state ends, the gaming state is shifted to the gaming state according to the type (big hit type) of the big hit symbol after the end of the big hit game.

  In the second special symbol, when "2R normal big hit (symbol group I)" is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit, time saving game state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game. When transitioning to the time saving game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number “0 times”, the fluctuation time shortening number “70 times”, and the easy entering state number “70 times” are set. Therefore, the time saving gaming state continues until the variation display count of the special symbol reaches the specific number (70 times) or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number (70 times), the variation of the special symbol When the time saving game state ends when the number of times of display reaches the specific number of times (70 times), transition to the normal gaming state from the fluctuation display of the special symbol of the next time, and the time saving game state is When it ends, it changes to the game state according to the kind (big hit classification) of the big hit symbol, after the end of the big hit game.

  Subsequently, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 54: is a comparison table of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in 3rd Embodiment. In addition, in this 3rd embodiment, although illustration of a change pattern table of a special symbol is omitted, in fact, as in the first embodiment, the change time (change pattern) of the special symbol is a special symbol It is selected with reference to the variation pattern table.

  In (A) in the figure, the variation time of the special symbol in the case where the gaming state is the normal gaming state is described. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "3 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the success or failure judgment is out, and is set to "30 seconds to 90 seconds" when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "10 minutes" when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a small hit or miss, and is set to "30 seconds to 90 seconds" when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a big hit ing. That is, as for the variation time of the second special symbol, an extremely long variation time (10 minutes) is set as compared with other variation times, except when the result of the judgment of the success or failure is a big hit.

  In (B) in the figure, the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the case where the gaming state is the short time gaming state is described. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" when the result of the success or failure judgment is out, and "30 seconds to 60 seconds" is set when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "10 minutes" when the result of the pass / fail judgment is out or small hit, and is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a big hit ing. That is, as for the variation time of the second special symbol, an extremely long variation time (10 minutes) is set as compared with other variation times, except when the result of the judgment of the success or failure is a big hit.

  In (C) in the figure, the variation time of the special symbol in the case where the gaming state is the latent probability variation gaming state is described. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" when the result of the success or failure judgment is out, and "30 seconds to 60 seconds" is set when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "0.5 seconds to 1 second" if the result of the pass / fail judgment is out or small hit, and if the result of the pass / fail judgment is a big hit, "30 seconds to 60 It is set to seconds. That is, as for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, extremely short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set as compared with other fluctuation time except when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a big hit. .

  In (D) in the drawing, the variation display time of the special symbol in the case where the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state is described. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" when the result of the success or failure judgment is out, and "30 seconds to 60 seconds" is set when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "10 minutes" when the result of the pass / fail judgment is out or small hit, and is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a big hit ing. That is, as for the variation time of the second special symbol, an extremely long variation time (10 minutes) is set as compared with other variation times, except when the result of the judgment of the success or failure is a big hit. In addition, as a modification, for small hitting fluctuation indication of 2nd special symbol in normal game state, time saving game state, probability variation game state, fluctuation time such as “10 minutes” “11 minutes” “12 minutes” There may be provided a plurality of patterns of super long fluctuations set for a very long time. Furthermore, also about the change display of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state, time saving gaming state, probability variation gaming state, for example, "10 minutes", "11 minutes", "12 minutes", etc. A plurality of patterns of set super long variation may be provided.

  Subsequently, the normal symbol lottery in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a schematic view for explaining the normal symbol lottery in the second embodiment. In the figure, (A) shows a normal symbol acceptance lottery table, (B) shows a normal symbol variation pattern table, and (C) shows a normal electric character opening pattern table.

  The hit probability of the normal pattern is set to "160/283" when the power chew support function is not activated as shown in FIG. 55 (A), and is "282 when the power chew support function is activated. It is set to / 283 ".

  The variation time of the normal symbol is set to "20 seconds" when the power chew support function is not activated as shown in FIG. 55 (B), and "one second when the power chew support function is activated. Is set.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (C), the opening pattern of the ordinary motor-operated part 522 is set to “open for 0.1 seconds” when the electric chow support function is not activated, and the electric chow support function is activated. If it is set to "4 seconds open".

  In the third embodiment of this configuration, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), the game ball is moved upward by hitting the left (to shoot the game ball by aiming at the left area PA1). It becomes game characteristics which let the starting opening 51A enter the ball, and to execute the determination of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol) mainly. In addition, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is possible to make the game ball enter the second start opening 52 by hitting the right (to shoot the game ball by aiming at the right area PA1), but the second special Since the fluctuation time of the symbol is set to a very long time (because the time required to finish the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes long), the game with extremely low fluctuation efficiency will be played It is better to put the gaming ball into the upper first start opening 51A by hitting the left than by putting the ball into the second start opening 52.

  Also, when the gaming state shifts to a short time gaming state (low probability high base state) or a probability variation gaming state (high probability / high base state), the electric power support function is activated to lower the first start opening 51B (normal electric motor) Since the ball entry ease of the game ball to the accessory 512) is enhanced, the game ball is moved to the upper first start opening 51A or the lower first start opening 52 by hitting the left (to shoot the game ball aiming at the right area PA1). It becomes a game characteristic which performs the acceptance determination of the 1st special symbol (variation display of the 1st special symbol) mainly by entering the ball. In addition, when the gaming state is a short time gaming state (low probability high base state) or a probability variation gaming state (high probability / high base state), the game ball by right-handed (shooting the game ball aiming at the right area PA1) The second start opening 52 can be made to enter the ball, but because the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to a very long time (the time required to finish the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes long ), It will play a game that is extremely inefficient in fluctuation efficiency, rather than entering the game ball into the second start hole 52 by right-handling, the game ball is up-first first opening 51A or lower first-starting hole by left-handling It is better to enter 51B.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state shifts to the latent probability variation gaming state (high probability low base state), a characteristic game (small hit (small hit) occurs frequently with the game ball entering the second start port 52 as a trigger It is better for the game ball to enter the second start opening 52 by hitting the right, than when the RUSH) is performed, instead of the game ball entering the upper first start opening 51A by hitting the left. It becomes the game characteristic which executes the pass / fail determination of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol) mainly.

  Here, when the gaming state is the latent probability variation gaming state, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball is made to enter the second starting opening 52 to perform the variable display of the second special symbol with high frequency, Small hit games will be executed frequently until the next big hit occurs. Thus, each time a small hit game is executed, approximately 2-3 game balls enter the large winning opening 54, and approximately 20 to 30 award balls are continuously obtained each time, thereby holding balls. It is possible to increase the

  In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, the big hit only when the gaming state at the time of the big hit is the latent probability change gaming state The game state after the end of the game shifts to the latent probability change game state (small hit RUSH mode). The reason is that when the gaming state is normal gaming state, short time gaming state, probability variation gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol is the main player of the game, so the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit ( This is to secure fair and fair gaming by suppressing transition to the latent probability variation gaming state (small hitting RUSH mode) which is the most advantageous state for the player when it becomes so-called per accident). In addition, when a specific big hit of the second special symbol occurs in the normal gaming state, the right hitting in the normal gaming state (or even in the normal gaming state can be entered or not by entering the probability variation gaming state instead of the latent probability variation gaming state) Improper act of forced entry from the normal gaming state to the latent probability change gaming state (small hit RUSH mode) by acquiring the specific big hit of the second special symbol by right hitting aiming at the second start opening 52 which is easy to enter the ball Can be prevented.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the time saving gaming state, or the probability variation gaming state, the left area PA1 is the main playing area of the game, and the gaming state is the latent probability variation gaming state The right side area PA2 is the main area of the game. Also in this third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, with regard to the prior determination on the operation holding ball of the special symbol, only the operation holding ball of the special symbol of the main player of the game in each gaming state is made in advance It may be a target of judgment. That is, in the normal gaming state, the time saving gaming state, in the probability variation gaming state, only the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is a target of prior determination, and in the latent probability variation gaming state, only the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is previously determined. It is preferable to target. In addition, in this third embodiment, for the variation time shortening function of the special symbol, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation time of the special symbol of the person who plays the main game in at least the gaming state is shortened. It should be done. That is, in the third embodiment, it can be said that the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated, the gaming state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is the main game (normal gaming state, time saving gaming state, probability variation) If the variation time of the first special symbol is shortened in the gaming state), and if the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened in the gaming state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main player of the game (latency probability variation gaming state) Good.

  Subsequently, the symbol determination signal in the third embodiment will be described. Also in this third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a gaming state in which the main game is to be played, it is triggered that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped. If the symbol confirmation signal is output as ON and the variable display of the second special symbol is a game state that means a game, the symbol determination signal is output ON triggered by the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol. Ru.

  Specifically, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol after the probability variation function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol simultaneously start operation while the electric support function is not activated. If the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped while the total of 100 stops (prescribed number of ST times) and the fixed display time (stop display time) elapses, the variation display of the first special symbol The symbol determination signal is not output on as triggered by the stop of. That is, when the gaming state is the latent probability variation gaming state, since the variable display of the second special symbol is the main player of the game, the symbol determination signal is turned on when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped. It will not be done.

  On the other hand, after the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol start to operate at the same time in the non-operating state of the electric chew support function, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol totals 100 If the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped except during the fixed number of times (specified ST number of times) and the fixed display time (stop display time) elapses, the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped The symbol determination signal is not output on as triggered by the event. That is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the time saving gaming state or the probability variation gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol is the main player of the game, and thus the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. , The symbol determination signal is not output on.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment basically has the same configuration as that of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained. That is, in the following description, it is possible to apply the same configuration as the fourth embodiment except in a special case.

  FIG. 56 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. On the front surface of the game board 20, a substantially circular game area PA in which the outer rails 41 and the inner rails 42 are fixed in an arc shape and on which game balls can be rolled is defined. A center decoration 21 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the central opening of the center decoration 21. The game area PA is a left area PA1 which is an area on the left side of the center decoration 21 (a board surface area corresponding to a left strike) with respect to the center decoration 21 substantially at the center, and an area on the right side of the center decoration 21 (right And the right side area PA2 which is the board surface area corresponding to An introduction passage 44 connecting the left area PA1 and the right area PA2 is provided in the upper part of the center decoration 21 so that the right-handed game ball can pass through the introduction passage 44 to reach the right area PA2. ing.

  A first starting opening 51 is disposed in the lower area of the center decoration 21. The first starting opening 51 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and is provided with a first starting opening switch 511 for detecting entry of the game ball. The first starting opening 51A is a normally open winning opening with an upward opening, and a gaming ball (a left-handed gaming ball) which mainly flows down the left side area PA1 can enter. Entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 51 is a trigger for the first special symbol lottery.

  The second starting opening 52 is disposed in the right area (right area PA2) of the center decoration 21, and the special winning opening 54 is disposed obliquely downward to the left. ing. The second starting opening 52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and is provided with a second starting opening switch 521 for detecting entry of the game ball. The second starting opening 52 is a normally open winning opening opened upward, and a game ball (a game ball hit to the right) flowing mainly down the right side area PA2 can enter. Entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 52 triggers the second special symbol lottery.

  The big winning opening 54 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the result of the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The special winning opening 54 is a special winning opening switch 541 for detecting entry of the game ball, a special electric jack 542 generally referred to as an attacker, and a large winning prize for opening and closing the special electric jack 542. A mouth solenoid 543 is provided. The special electric character 542 is variable between an open state where the game ball can enter or is easy to enter and a closed state where the game ball can not enter or difficult to enter the big winning opening 54. In the special game (big hit game, small hit game), when firing the game ball, hitting the right area PA2 so-called right hit makes it easy to enter the big winning opening 54 There is.

  In the fourth embodiment, the gaming balls flowing down the left side area PA1 can mainly enter the first starting opening 51. On the other hand, gaming balls flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter the second starting opening 52 or the big winning opening 54 mainly. In the fourth embodiment, since the first starting opening 51 and the second starting opening 52 are configured as non-variable starting openings (always open starting openings), the ordinary electric vehicle is mounted. Not.

  Subsequently, the big hit type (big hit breakdown) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 57 is a schematic view showing a special symbol big hit symbol table as a big hit breakdown in the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 57 (A) is a view schematically showing a first special symbol big hit symbol table. In this first special symbol big hit symbol table, symbol group, big hit type, specified number of rounds of big hit game, open time (maximum open time) of big winning opening 54 of each round for special symbol per symbol random number They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol big hit table, three types of big hit types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, it is divided into 10R specific big hit (symbol group A), 4R specific big hit (symbol group B), and 4R normal big hit (symbol group C). In the 10R specific big hit (design group A), the prescribed number of rounds of the big hit game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. 4R specific big hit (symbol group B) and 4R normal big hit (symbol group C), the specified number of rounds of big hit game is 4 rounds, the opening time (maximum opening time) of big winning opening 54 in 1 round game is It is 28 seconds.

  FIG. 57 (B) is a view schematically showing a second special symbol big hit symbol table. In this second special symbol big hit symbol table, symbol group, big hit type, specified number of rounds of big hit game, open time (maximum open time) of big winning opening 54 of each round for special symbol per pattern random number They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol big hit table, two types of big hit types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, it is divided into 10R specific big hit (symbol group D) and 4R normal big hit (symbol group E). In the 10R specific big hit (design group D), the prescribed number of rounds of the big hit game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. In the 4R normal big hit (design group E), the prescribed number of rounds of the big hit game is 4 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds.

  Subsequently, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a comparison table of variation times of special symbols in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in this 4th embodiment, although illustration of a change pattern table of a special symbol is omitted, in fact, as in the first embodiment, a change time (change pattern) of a special symbol is a special symbol It is selected with reference to the variation pattern table.

  In (A) in the figure, the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the case where the gaming state is the first gaming state (low probability state) is described. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "3 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the success or failure judgment is out, and is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "10 minutes" when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a small hit or miss, and is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a big hit ing. That is, as for the variation time of the second special symbol, an extremely long variation time (10 minutes) is set as compared with other variation times, except when the result of the judgment of the success or failure is a big hit.

  In (B) in the figure, the variation time of the special symbol in the case where the gaming state is the second gaming state (high probability state) is described. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" when the result of the success or failure judgment is out, and "30 seconds to 60 seconds" is set when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "0.5 seconds to 1 second" if the result of the pass / fail judgment is out or small hit, and if the result of the pass / fail judgment is a big hit, "30 seconds to 60 It is set to seconds. That is, as for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, extremely short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set as compared with other fluctuation time except when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a big hit. . In addition, as a modification, for small hit fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first gaming state, for example, "10 minutes", "11 minutes", "12 minutes", etc., set to a long time the fluctuation time is extremely It is possible to have a plurality of patterns of super long fluctuations. In addition, also regarding the out-of-out variation display of the second special symbol in the first gaming state, for example, the super long variation set to a long time such as "10 minutes", "11 minutes", "12 minutes" etc. Multiple patterns may be provided.

  In the fourth embodiment, the first gaming state in which the big hit probability is set to the relatively low probability (about 1/329) and the big hit probability are relatively the high probability (about 1 The second gaming state set to 80) is set. The first gaming state is a gaming state set after the end of the big hit game, triggered by having won the “4R normal big hit” as a big hit type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In addition, the second game state is a game that is set after the end of the big hit game triggered by having won the "10R specific big hit" or "4R specific big hit" as a jackpot type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is a state.

  When the gaming state is the first gaming state (low probability state), the game ball is made to enter the first starting opening 51 by left-handed hitting (to shoot the gaming ball by aiming at the left area PA1), and the first special It becomes the game characteristic which executes the acceptance / rejection determination (the 1st special symbol's fluctuation display) of the design mainly. In addition, when the gaming state is the first gaming state, the game ball can be made to enter the second starting opening 52 by hitting the right (shooting the gaming ball by aiming at the right area PA1), but the second special Since the fluctuation time of the symbol is set to a very long time (because the time required to finish the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes long), the game with extremely low fluctuation efficiency will be played It is better to let the game ball enter the first starting opening 51 by hitting the left than hitting the ball into the second starting opening 52.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the second gaming state (high probability state), a characteristic game (small hit RUSH) in which the small hit game frequently occurs triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 52 It is better to enter the game ball into the second start hole 52 by hitting the right than by putting the game ball into the first start hole 51 by being hit left, as a result, as a result, the second special symbol It becomes the game characteristic which executes the success or failure judgment (the fluctuation display of the second special symbol) mainly. Therefore, also in the fourth embodiment, when the gaming state is the second gaming state, as in the first to third embodiments described above, the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 52 is triggered. A small hit RUSH mode in which a small hit game occurs frequently is executed.

[Common modification example]
Next, common modifications of the first to fourth embodiments will be described. The gaming machine according to this common variation basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of any of the above-described first to fourth embodiments, and the same configuration will hereinafter be described. The same symbols are given to the parts that are possessed, the explanation is omitted, and mainly the different parts are explained.

<Common Modification 1>
In the above embodiment, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, a normal probability variation gaming machine is employed to determine the presence or absence of the probability change transition based on the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the special symbol. It is not limited, and when the result of the success or failure judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, the presence or absence of definite variation transition is determined according to whether or not the game ball enters a specific area during execution of the big hit game V A probability change gaming machine may be adopted. In addition, as a modification of the gaming machine of the above embodiment, a probability variation gaming state provided triggered by a big hit with the first special symbol or the second special symbol with the preset limit number of times (upper limit number of times) as a limit Alternatively, a gaming machine provided with a limiter function for limiting the number of consecutive occurrences of the latent probability variation gaming state may be adopted. Also, in the above embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol has been illustrated for the number of times and a definite change machine operated continuously for the specified ST times (for example 100 times), but the probability variation function of the special symbol is after the end of the big hit game It may be configured as a normal odd change machine that continues until the next big hit occurs.

<Common Modification 2>
In the above embodiment, the model in which only one large winning opening is mounted in the game area is described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a model in which a plurality of large winning openings are mounted in the game area is applied May be In addition, when a model equipped with a plurality of big winning openings is adopted, as the above V probability variation gaming machine, it has a specific area (probability fluctuation function operation area, V area) which becomes an operation trigger of the probability fluctuation function of special symbol. Two or more large winning openings may be mounted, such as a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening not having this specific area (probability variation function operation area, V area). As an example of the board layout, the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening may be arranged substantially vertically or substantially horizontally in the right area of the game area, or the first large winning opening may be arranged. The board surface area to be used may be different from the board surface area where the second big winning opening is arranged. In that case, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the gaming ball enters the first big winning opening (the number of unit winning balls) and the payout when the gaming ball enters the second big winning opening The number of winning balls (unit winning balls) may be the same or different. In addition, among the two big winning openings, the first big winning opening (or the second big winning opening) is a large winning winning opening for small hit game, the second large winning winning opening (or the first large winning opening) for big hitting gaming It may be configured as a big prize winning opening. In that case, even if the number of winning balls (unit winning balls) for the large winning opening for small hitting games is 10, and the winning balls for large hitting opening for the large hitting playing (unit winning balls) is 15, etc. Good.

<Common Modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, among the plurality of types of gaming states, the latent probability variation gaming state is defined as the gaming state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the power chew support function is not activated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the latent probability variation gaming state is defined as a gaming state in which only the probability variation function of the special symbol operates and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol and the electric cheering support function do not operate. May be In addition, the special symbol variation time shortening function is divided into the first special symbol variation time shortening function and the second special symbol variation time shortening function, and the latent probability variation gaming state is the special symbol probability variation function and the first symbol special variation 2 Special symbol variation time reduction function is activated, it may be defined as a gaming state in which the electronic chew support function is not activated. In addition, electric chew support function operates in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function (the second special symbol fluctuation time shortening function), but the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function (the second special symbol fluctuation time) And may operate independently of the shortening function).

  Next, in order to facilitate understanding of the technical significance of the above embodiments (first to fourth embodiments) and the modified example, the problems corresponding to the above embodiment and the modified example will be outlined.

  In conventional pachinko machines, it is known to execute a small hit game in which the gain obtained is set relatively lower than that of the big hit game when the result of the above judgment of the hit or not corresponds to the small hit (for example, See "JP 2012-152370").

  The pachinko game machine of the conventional model is provided with various gaming states such as a normal gaming state in which the probability of success or failure determination is set to the normal probability, and an advantageous gaming state in which the probability of success or failure in determination is higher than the normal probability. It is known that the game transitions to the normal gaming state when the number of times of variation display of symbols reaches a predetermined number in the advantageous gaming state (see, for example, "Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-182873").

  The pachinko gaming machine of the conventional type, for example, various probability conditions such as a probability change gaming state in which the winning probability of the success or failure judgment is increased, and a time-saving gaming state in which the efficiency of symbol variation for indicating or notifying the result of the success or failure judgment is enhanced. It is known to provide a gaming state and to report the remaining number of symbol variations until the gaming state ends (see, for example, "Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-210759").

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the conventional model, when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit, the gaming state after the end of the special game may differ depending on the type of the big hit symbol displayed and stopped at the end of the fluctuation display. It is known (for example, refer to "Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2011-120804").

  Among pachinko gaming machines of the conventional type, there is known one that outputs game information regarding the operating status of the gaming machine as an external information signal to an external device disposed outside the gaming machine (e.g. See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2006-325753 "Patent Document 1).

  In conventional pachinko gaming machines, various gaming states such as a probability change gaming state in which the probability of success or failure determination has been increased, or a time-saving gaming state in which the efficiency of symbol variation for indicating or notifying the result of success or failure determination is enhanced. And a variable effect according to the type of the game state is developed (see, for example, "Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-115441").

  However, since pachinko gaming machines adopting such a configuration already exist in large numbers as conventional models, in order to differentiate them from conventional models, there is a demand for further improvement in the fun of gaming. .

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment and the modification, the above-described configuration is adopted for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, and the above-described effects are achieved.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and modification, and can be appropriately improved without departing from the scope of the present invention. In addition, components obtained by appropriately combining the components described in the above embodiment and the modification, or some of the components described in the above embodiment and the modification may be deleted or converted by a known technique or the like Are also included in the scope of the present invention.

PM Pachinko game machine PA game area PA1 left area PA2 right area 1 outer frame 2 front frame 5 glass frame 20 game board 51 first start opening 52 second start opening 53 operation gate 54 large winning opening 70 effect display device 71 first special The symbol display device 72 The second special symbol display device 91 The first combination run gate 92 The second combination run gate 100 The main control board 200 The effect control board 300 The image control board 400 The payout control board 500 The power supply board 600 The external information terminal board 511 1 opening opening switch 521 second opening opening switch 531 operation gate switch 541 large winning opening switch 911 first combination operation gate switch 921 second combination operation gate switch

Claims (1)

A game board in which a game area is formed,
A first start opening provided at a predetermined position of the game area, and capable of entering a game ball;
A second starting opening provided at a position different from the first starting opening of the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball;
First success or failure judgment means for executing a judgment on success or failure in response to the game ball entering the first starting opening as a trigger;
A second pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening;
Special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player if the result of the judgment of success or failure by the first judgment unit or the result of judgment of success by the second judgment unit is a big hit;
The low probability state in which the result of the success or failure judgment by the first success or failure judgment means and the result of the success or failure judgment by the second success or failure judgment means become a big hit with a predetermined probability, the result of the success or failure judgment by the first success or failure judgment means, and the second Lottery state control means having a high probability state in which the result of the success or failure judgment by the good or bad judgment means is a big hit with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and setting of the low probability state or setting of the high probability state;
A first symbol display device in which a first symbol indicating a result of the success or failure judgment by the first success or failure judgment means is variably displayed and stopped;
A second symbol display device in which a second symbol indicating a result of the success or failure determination by the second success or failure determination means is variably displayed and stopped;
First symbol display control means for variably displaying and stopping the first symbol in the first symbol display device;
Second symbol display control means for variably displaying and stopping the second symbol in the second symbol display device;
The first fluctuation state in which the average value of the fluctuation display time of the second symbol is a predetermined time, and the second fluctuation state in which the average value of the fluctuation display time of the second pattern is shorter than the predetermined time Fluctuation state control means capable of at least setting of the first fluctuation state or setting of the second fluctuation state;
An effect display device for displaying an effect indicating the result of the success or failure judgment by the first success or failure judgment means or the result of the success or failure judgment by the second success or failure judgment means;
And effect determination means for determining the content of the effect to be displayed on the effect display device;
In the high probability state and the second fluctuation state, when the result of the judgment of the second judgment by the second judgment unit is a big hit, and the stop symbol of the second symbol showing the big hit is a predetermined big hit symbol, the execution is triggered by the big hit After the end of the special game played, it is possible to set the high probability state and the second fluctuation state,
In the low probability state and the first fluctuation state, when the result of the judgment of the success or failure by the second validity judgment means is a big hit, and the stop symbol of the second symbol showing the big hit is the predetermined big hit symbol, the big hit is triggered. After the end of the special game to be executed, do not set the high probability state and the second fluctuation state,
The probability of setting the high probability state and the second fluctuation state after the end of the special game which is executed triggered by the result of the judgment by the first judgment unit becoming a big hit in the high probability state and the second fluctuation state; In the low probability state and the first fluctuation state, there is a probability that the high probability state and the second fluctuation state are set after the end of the special game executed triggered by the result of the judgment of the judgment by the first validity judgment means becoming a big hit in the first fluctuation state. A pachinko gaming machine characterized by having the same probability.

Images